JP2015164584A - management device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To announce an acquired token numbers (TY) in a unit period consisting of a jackpot period and an RT period after the jackpot period, even in a slot machine that does not output signals during the replay time (RT).SOLUTION: A management device manages game information in a slot machine in which a probability to shift to a replay time state is to be enhanced on a condition that an occurrence of a prescribed special winning combination (a jackpot) is permitted. On the basis of bet number information, provided information by which the number of tokens to be put out according to a winning can be specified, and special winning period specifying information, a unit period is specified, the unit period consisting of a period in which the special winning combination is generated and a period of the replay time state generated by the special winning combination. A difference number (an acquired token numbers per unit; a unit TY) that is a difference between the number of bets during the one unit period and the number of imparted game media is calculated and displayed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a management device that manages game information in a slot machine.

  Conventionally, as a management device for managing game information in a slot machine, for example, it is advantageous for a player because a replay winning is generated with high probability due to occurrence of a bonus which is a special gaming state advantageous for the player. The replay time (RT) period is specified based on the signal during the replay time (RT) output from the slot machine during the replay time state, and the replay time (replay time (RT) is an advantageous state other than the bonus period. (RT) There is one that calculates and displays the number of acquired medals (TY) in one unit with a period as one unit (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-172193 A (page 19, FIG. 21)

  However, in Patent Document 1, the replay time (RT) period, which is an example of an advantageous state other than the bonus, is specified based on the signal during the replay time (RT) output from the slot machine. For slot machines that do not output a signal during the time (RT), provide information on the number of medals (TY) obtained with the bonus period and the replay time (RT) period, which is an advantageous state other than the bonus, as one unit. There was a problem that could not.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such a problem, and the slot machine to be managed does not output a signal indicating that it is in an advantageous state other than a bonus, such as a signal during replay time (RT). A management device capable of providing information on the number of game media (TY) acquired for one unit period consisting of a bonus (special game state) and an advantageous state other than the bonus (expected increase state) even for a machine. The purpose is to provide.

In order to solve the above problem, a management device according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets based on the game medium for one game, and the display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be individually identified. As a result, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device. When a winning occurs, a number of game media corresponding to the generated winning is given to the player. A management device that centrally manages game information in a plurality of slot machines that transition to an expected increase state in which an expected increase / decrease rate of game media per game exceeds 1 when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
Specify bet amount information that can specify the bet amount, grant information that can specify the number of game media to be awarded in accordance with the winning, and a period in which a special gaming state is shifted to when a predetermined special winning combination is generated Information input means for inputting possible special gaming state period specific information;
Game number specifying means for specifying the number of games based on the betting number information;
Determination means for determining a transition to the expected increase state based on the number of games specified by the number-of-games specifying means and the grant information input to the information input means;
The determination method used for determining the transition to the expected increase state in the determination means includes the bet number specified from the bet number information input to the information input means and the grant information input to the information input means A plurality of determination methods including: a first determination method based on a difference from the number of game media specified from the first and a second determination method based on a frequency of occurrence of a specific combination based on the grant information input to the information input unit Setting means to set from home,
Based on the bet amount information and the grant information input to the information input means, the bet number and the number of game media to be granted in one unit period consisting of the special gaming state and the expected increase state A calculation means for calculating a difference number;
1 unit period difference number specifying information display means for displaying 1 unit period difference number specifying information capable of specifying the difference number in one unit period calculated by the calculating means;
Based on the information input to the information input means, the transition status to the expected increase state during the special game state after the end of the one special game state until the next special game state is specified Expected increase transition information display means for displaying possible expected increase transition information,
With
In the setting means, setting using only the first determination method, setting using only the second determination method, and setting using both the first determination method and the second determination method are possible. It is characterized by being.
According to this feature, even if the slot machine to be managed is a slot machine that does not output a signal during the replay time (RT), the number of acquired game media (TY) in one unit period consisting of a special game state and an expected increase state Information can be provided. Moreover, the transition state to the expected increase state between special game states can also be provided.

The management device according to means 1 of the present invention is:
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets based on game media for one game, and a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the display result is derived and displayed in the transparent area 51b), one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device, and when the winning occurs, A corresponding number of game media are given to the player,
When predetermined transition conditions are satisfied, game information in a plurality of slot machines that transition to a replay time state in which a replay winning combination that can be replayed without setting a new bet is likely to occur. A management device for centralized management,
The bet number information (medal IN signal) that can specify the bet number, the grant information (medal OUT signal) that can specify the number of game media to be awarded according to the winning, and the occurrence of a predetermined special winning combination Special game state period specifying information (BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal) that can specify the period of the special game state to be transferred is input, or the betting number information, the grant information, and the special game state period specification Information input means (collection unit) for inputting game execution information (medal IN signal) that can specify that the game has been executed in addition to information or replay winning information (replay signal) indicating that the replay winning combination has occurred 50, first port 581 to fourth port 584),
The transition to the replay time state is determined based on the information input to the information input means, and the special game state or the replay time is determined based on the transition from the normal state to the special game state or the replay time state. 1 unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; 1 unit determination process) for specifying 1 unit period (1 unit) which is a period from the state to the normal state;
The usage determination method used to determine the transition to the replay time state in the one unit period specifying unit is input to the information input unit and the bet number specified from the bet number information input to the information input unit. A plurality of first determination methods based on the number of differences from the number of game media specified from the grant information, and a second determination method based on the occurrence frequency of the specific combination based on the grant information input to the information input means. Setting means for selecting and setting from among the determination methods;
Based on the bet number information and the grant information input to the information input means, the difference between the bet number and the number of game media to be granted in the one unit period specified by the one unit period specifying means (the number of unit acquired medals; Calculating means (unit-specific gaming state history table) for calculating unit TY and unit TY average;
1 unit period difference number specifying information display means (CPU 142, each table) for displaying 1 unit period difference number specifying information (table game information screen 2) that can specify the difference number in one unit period calculated by the calculating means. Game information display processing and display device 147);
Based on the information input to the information input means, the state of transition to the replay time state between special winnings after the end of the period of one special winning combination until the next special winning combination wins is stored. Replay time transition status storage means;
Replay time transition information display means for displaying replay time transition information capable of specifying the transition status to the replay time state between special winnings stored in the replay time transition status storage means;
With
In the setting means, setting using only the first determination method, setting using only the second determination method, and setting using both the first determination method and the second determination method are possible. Yes,
The one unit period specifying unit uses at least one of the game execution information, the grant information, and the replay winning information input to the information input unit using the usage determination method set by the setting unit. Based on the above, the transition to the replay time state is determined.
According to this feature, even if the slot machine to be managed is a slot machine that does not output a signal during the replay time (RT), the period of the special winning combination and the one unit period including the replay time (RT) period are included. Information on the number of acquired game media (TY) can be provided. Moreover, the transition state to the replay time state between special winnings can also be provided.

The management device according to means 2 of the present invention is the management device according to means 1,
The slot machine is in a chance zone state in which the probability that the transition condition is satisfied is higher than a normal state when the special winning combination occurs, and the transition condition is satisfied in the chance zone state. As a slot machine that shifts to the replay time state,
Chance zone period specifying information (BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal) that can specify the period of the chance zone state is input to the information input means,
The one unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; one unit determination process) specifies one unit period including a chance zone state period based on the chance zone period specifying information input to the information input means. It is characterized by doing.
According to this feature, information on the number of acquired game media (TY) for one unit period including the period in the chance zone state can be provided also for the slot machine in the chance zone state.

The management device according to means 3 of the present invention is the management device according to means 2,
The one unit period specifying means includes:
It is determined whether or not the replay time state has been entered during the chance zone period specified by the chance zone period specifying information,
When it is determined that the replay time state has not been reached (when it is determined that the chance zone ends in the chance zone determination process), one unit period (one unit) that does not include the chance zone period that is the target of the determination It is characterized by specifying.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide more appropriate information on the number of acquired game media (TY) in one unit period, excluding the chance zone period in which the player does not shift to the replay time state in which there was no profit for the player. it can.

The management device according to means 4 of the present invention is the management device according to means 2 or 3,
Re-entry model setting means for setting whether or not the slot machine is a re-entry type slot machine that transitions again to the chance zone state after the end of the replay time state (hole computer 140, RT related setting screen) )
The one unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; replay time determination process, one unit determination process) determines the end of the replay time state, and determines the end of the determined replay time state as a new chance zone state. And 1 unit period (1 unit) including the new chance zone state is specified.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide information on the number of acquired game media (TY) in a more appropriate one unit period including a new chance zone state even for a re-entry type slot machine.

The management device according to means 5 of the present invention is the management device according to any one of means 2 to means 4,
Operation slot model setting means (a hall computer 140, RT-related setting screen) for setting whether or not the slot machine is an operation slot type slot machine that shifts to the chance zone state by performing a predetermined operation ,
The one-unit-period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; SK17, Sy4) is set when the slot machine is set as an operation entry type slot machine by the operation entry model setting means (SK16, Sy3). "Yes") is based on the chance zone state based on the establishment of a predetermined operation response condition (input of a setting change signal, reception of a connection confirmation request) for specifying or estimating that the predetermined operation has been performed. It is characterized in that one unit period (one unit) including the chance zone state in which the start is determined is specified.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide information on the number of acquired game media (TY) in a more appropriate one unit period including the chance zone state due to the execution of the predetermined operation even for the operation-entry type slot machine.

The management device according to means 6 of the present invention is the management device according to any one of claim 1, means 1 to 5,
Information used by the one-unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 279; replay time determination process) for determining whether the replay time state has shifted or ended is the game execution information, the grant information, and the replay winning information. Replay time determination information type setting means (hole computer 140, RT related setting screen) for setting which information to be included,
The one unit period specifying means determines the transition or end of the replay time state based on the information set by the replay time determination information type setting means, and includes one unit period including the determined replay time state ( 1 unit) is specified.
According to this feature, since the replay time period can be accurately specified even for slot machines having different replay time start and / or end conditions, information on the number of acquired game media (TY) for one unit period is provided. can do.

The management device according to means 7 of the present invention is the management device according to any one of claim 1, means 1 to 6,
The one unit period specifying means determines the end of the replay time state for which transition has been determined under a condition different from the condition for determining the transition to the replay time state.
According to this feature, the end of the replay time state can be determined under conditions different from the conditions for determining the transition to the replay time state.

The management device according to means 8 of the present invention is the management device according to any one of claim 1, means 1 to means 7,
In the setting means, a plurality of determination methods can be selected and set as the usage determination method,
The one unit period specifying means determines that the transition to the replay time state has been made by determining that the transition to the replay time state has been made by all the determination methods set in the usage determination method. .
According to this feature, the weak points of each determination method can be complemented by selecting a plurality of determination methods.

The management device according to means 9 of the present invention is the management device according to means 8,
In the determination method, the setting unit can be selected together with another determination method, and the determination by the one unit period specifying unit is performed in cooperation with another determination method selected redundantly. A cooperative determination method, and an independent determination method in which determination by the one unit period specifying unit is performed independently without linking with other determination methods,
In the setting means, the cooperation determination method and the independent determination method can be selected.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, determination using the single determination method and the cooperation determination method can be performed.

1 is a system configuration diagram illustrating a configuration of a gaming system according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the slot machine and medal lending machine and call lamp apparatus which are installed in the game island used in Example 1 of this invention. It is an enlarged front view which shows the slot machine used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the slot machine used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of the reel of the slot machine used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning combination table of the slot machine used for Example 1 of this invention. The figure which shows the winning probability of the combination of the combination according to a set value and combination in the case where no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state or RT (replay time) in the slot machine used in Embodiment 1 of the present invention It is. (A) is a diagram showing a signal output type of the slot machine used in the first embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a diagram showing an RT type of the slot machine used in the first embodiment of the present invention. . It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the calling lamp apparatus in Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the various signals and information which are exchanged between each apparatus which comprises the game system in Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the output form of each signal output from the slot machine used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the small role game counter in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the digest game number counter in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the latest game table in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game information table in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game status log | history table in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of the collection unit in Example 1 of this invention, (b) is a figure which shows the structure of the table | game game information data transmitted from the collection unit of Example 1 of this invention. It is. It is a figure which shows the small role game counter in the collection unit used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the digest game number counter in the collection unit used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the latest game table in the collection unit used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game information table in the collection unit used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state log | history table in the collection unit used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the hall computer used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the today game information table in the hall computer used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the separate game state log | history table in the hall computer used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the duplicate win related setting screen in the hall computer of Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows RT related setting screen in the hall computer of Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the continuous unit related setting screen in the hall computer of Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the interrupt monitoring process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the input relevant process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the latest game table update process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the payout related process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the replay time determination process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the chance zone determination process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the game state specific process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the setting value estimation process implemented in the ring lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the game state log | history table initialization process implemented in the call lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the 1 unit determination process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination method of RT start determination implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination method of RT completion | finish determination implemented in the call lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1 of this invention. (A)-(c) is a figure which shows the determination example of 1 unit determination determined by the 1 continuation determination process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows transition of the display content in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows transition of the display content in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows transition of the display content in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows transition of the display content in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game information screen 1 classified by table displayed in the hall computer used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game information screen 2 classified by table displayed in the hall computer used for Example 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning combination table of the slot machine used for Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the various signals and information which are exchanged between each apparatus which comprises the game system in Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the output form of each signal output from the slot machine used for Example 2 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the calling lamp apparatus in Example 2 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the collection unit in Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game information table in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the duplicate win related setting screen in the hall computer of Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the duplicate winning expectation degree data used in Example 2 of this invention. In the slot machine used in Embodiment 2 of the present invention, when any special combination is not carried over in the normal gaming state or RT, it is a diagram showing the winning probability of the combination of the combination and combination by set value. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the interrupt monitoring process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus (collection unit) used for Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the payout related process implemented in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the small role relevant process implemented in the ringing lamp apparatus used for Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the processing content of the small combination related process 2 implemented in the collection unit used for Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the latest game table in the calling lamp apparatus used for Example 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game information table in the collection unit used for Example 2 of this invention.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a configuration of a gaming system of the present embodiment to which a hall computer 140 and a collection unit 50 which are management devices of the present invention are applied.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system according to the present embodiment includes slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ arranged in parallel on a plurality of gaming islands in a game arcade, and slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. On the other hand, the call lamp device 200 installed in a one-to-one correspondence, the collection unit 50 that collects game information of each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, and the game information collected by the collection unit 50 Game information data including game information of the relay units 60 that relay the game information data to the hall computer 140 and the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ installed in the game hall relayed by the relay units 60 And a hall computer 140 that manages game information and the like of each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ included in the received game information data.

  In the gaming island of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ and game media for playing in the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ are provided on the side surfaces thereof. A medal lending machine 102 for lending a medal is provided side by side, and a calling lamp device 200 is provided above the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. The calling lamp device 200 has a display function for various game information, messages, and the like by having a display unit on the front side in addition to a normal lamp lighting function.

  Further, the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of this embodiment and the collecting unit 50 are connected via a signal cable 59 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 11, and each collecting unit 50 is further connected to a communication cable. 61. The collection unit 50 and the relay unit 60 are connected to each other via a simple local area network, and the collection unit 50 is connected to the relay unit 60 via the 61. The collection unit 50 is connected to each slot machine 1, 1 ′. The game information data including game information collected by the input of various signals to be described later output from 1 ″ and the game state history data including the game state history (state-specific data) are transmitted.

  Further, each of these relay units 60 is connected to the hall computer 140 via a hub 57 by a communication cable 58, and the relay unit 60 and the hall computer 140 are both connected by a local area network capable of relatively high-speed data communication. The transmission data transmitted from each collection unit 50 is relayed by the relay unit 60 and transmitted to the hall computer 140, so that the hall computer 140 is connected to each slot machine 1, Information related to 1 ′ and 1 ″ can be collected and centrally managed.

  The call lamp device 200 of this embodiment is also connected to the hall computer 140 via the relay unit 60 in the same manner as the collection unit 50. The call lamp device 200 and the hall computer 140 are connected via the relay unit 60. Two-way data communication can be performed.

  First, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ used in the present embodiment will be described below. The slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the present embodiment includes a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open, And a front door pivotally supported on the side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. Are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 3, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door. Has been placed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, “red 7 (black 7 in the drawing)”, “white 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, “bell”, “plum”, and “orange” are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 pieces each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number of the bet, using a credit, a predetermined number of bet numbers determined according to the game state within the range (in this embodiment, a normal game state, which will be described later, MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3 in RT (replay time) and chance zone state (only models that generate the chance zone state), 1 in the regular bonus described later, medal stored as credit And the medals used to set the bet amount (the medals used for setting the credit and bet number are returned). Switch 10, start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and game history data relating to games that have already been performed A selection switch 56 and a determination switch 57 that are operated when browsing, initializing, and selecting a production mode are provided so as to be operable by the player.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying by light that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is valid. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 4).

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, changing a set value described later And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or medal payout outlet 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a medal insertion sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side are provided. ing.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) comprising the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensor 33 capable of detecting the respective reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and the hopper motor 34 being paid out. A payout sensor 35 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, automatic selection for enabling / disabling the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement at the end of the big bonus, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) It functions as a settlement switch 29, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for releasing an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery Switch 38, the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ according to the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. Can be operated by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 3) become effective. Then, the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started In this embodiment, the normal gaming state, RT, chance zone state (chance zone state) described later as a prescribed number of bets. (Only for models that generate the game), 3 cards are determined, and 1 is determined in the regular bonus described later. If the medal is inserted beyond the numbers, that amount is added to the credit.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 3). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, the number of medals to be awarded in one game is limited to 10 in the upper limit (in this embodiment, the normal game state and RT (replay time) described later, and the chance zone state (only models in which the chance zone state occurs). If the total payout number exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals will be awarded. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ include a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 is provided, the gaming state is controlled by the game control board 40, the presentation according to the gaming state is controlled by the presentation control board 90, and the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is controlled by the power supply board 100. A driving power source for the electric components is generated and supplied to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and the AC100V power supply generates DC voltages necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. 40 and the effect control board 90 connected via the game control board 40.

  In particular, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, voltages are supplied to at least a sub-control unit 91 (CPU 91a) described later and a display control circuit 92 described later, among the power supply lines that supply the voltage generated by the power supply substrate 100 to each unit. Power supply line for supplying voltage to a later-described liquid crystal drive circuit 215 mounted on the liquid crystal display 51, a power supply line for supplying voltage to an LED drive circuit 93 described later, and a voltage applied to a reel LED 55 described later. A power supply line to be supplied is wired electrically independently.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the above-described one-sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, and reel sensor 33. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) are used. A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. Power supply voltage supplied to LED drive circuit 47, slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ to be performed A power interruption detection circuit 48 that monitors and detects a voltage drop when the voltage drop is detected, and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 41a, the CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for supplying a reset signal to the device and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a outputs an external output signal via the I / O port 41d and the external output board 110 (see FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 8A, the output signal of the external output signal differs depending on the model.

  Specifically, the external output signals of the general type slot machine 1 include a medal IN signal, a medal OUT signal, a BB1 signal, a BB2 signal, and an RB signal. The external output signal of the replay output type slot machine 1 ′ is Including the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, and replay signal, the external output signal of the slot machine 1 "of all output type models is the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, BB1 signal, BB2 signal , RB signal, replay signal, and setting change signal.

  As shown in FIG. 12C, the setting change signal is a repetitive signal with a predetermined interval that is output during the setting change process, and the replay signal is a slot machine 1 ′, as shown in FIG. At 1 ″, when three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed as a display result on the fluoroscopic window 3 and the game is over, a predetermined pulse is output when a replay is won based on the displayed display result. It is a width signal.

  When these replays are won, from any of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the medal OUT signal of the number of bets corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the normal gaming state, RT (replay time), and In the chance zone state, a medal OUT signal having the number of pulses corresponding to the bet number “3” is output. The slot machine 1, 1 ', 1 "of the present embodiment has a bet number" 1 "in the regular bonus, but the replay is not won internally in the regular bonus, so it wins the replay. In this case, a medal OUT signal having a pulse number “3” is uniquely output.

  The medal IN signal is a signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, and is output at the start of the game. The medal OUT signal is a signal indicating the number of medals awarded by winning, and is output when a winning occurs. The BB1 signal is a signal indicating that a big bonus (1), which will be described later, is in progress, and is output over a period from when the big bonus (1) starts until the big bonus (1) ends. The BB2 signal is a signal indicating that a big bonus (2), which will be described later, is in progress, and is output over a period until the big bonus (2) ends after the big bonus (2) starts. The RB signal is a signal indicating that a regular bonus, which will be described later, is in effect, and is output over a period after the regular bonus starts and until the regular bonus ends. When the regular bonus is controlled during the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2), as shown in FIG. 12 (a), both the BB1 signal or both the BB2 signal and the RB signal are output.

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected with the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 described above, and detection signals of these connected switches are input.

  Connected to the effect control board 90 are electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4), effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. These electric components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the connected liquid crystal display 51, an LED LED circuit 93 that controls driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that provides a reset signal to the CPU 91a when the initialization command from the CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, or a switch detection circuit 96 that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90; Clock device 97 for outputting time information including date information and time information, slot The power failure detection circuit 98 that monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub-control unit 91 when a voltage drop is detected, etc. The CPU 91a receives various commands for performing the presentation upon receiving the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the detection of the switches connected to the presentation control board 90. Then, each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  In the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. The setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 being turned on, the setting is made. 1 is displayed as an initial value of the setting value on the value display 24, and the mode shifts to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In the setting changing mode, the reset / setting switch 38 is turned on. When operated, the set value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operated from the setting 6, it returns to the setting 1), and when the start switch 7 is operated. The set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the game can proceed. Shifts to state. Note that, when the determined setting value is the setting change is stored in RAM41c of the main control unit 41, a setting change signal previously described is output.

  In other words, the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 in the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of this embodiment use a plurality of settings with different percentages in which the winning is permitted in the internal lottery as a pre-determining means. Any set value can be selected from the values (1 to 6), and the reset / setting switch 38 forms a set value selection means.

  As described above, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the present embodiment has a predetermined number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state, and the predetermined number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state. In this embodiment, as will be described later, as a gaming state, a regular bonus, a normal gaming state, an RT (replay time), a chance zone state ( (Only models that generate chance zones), of which 1 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, and 3 as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the normal gaming state, RT, and chance zone state. Therefore, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started if the bet number is set to 1, and the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state. In the state, RT, or chance zone state, the game can be started when the bet number is set to 3. In this embodiment, a predetermined number of bets are set according to the game state. When all the winning lines L1 to L5 are activated and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is 1, all winning lines L1 are set when 1 is set as the bet number. If L5 is activated and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is 3, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 3 is set as the betting number.

  In the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of this embodiment, when all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the winning line is activated (in this embodiment, all winning lines are always activated). Therefore, in the following description, an activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a combination of symbols called “combinations” is placed on the winning combination.The types of winning winning combinations are determined according to the gaming state. However, it can be broadly divided into a small role that involves paying out medals, a replay role that allows the start of the next game without the need to set the number of bets, and a special role that is accompanied by a transition of the game state. In the following, a small role and a replay (replay) role are collectively referred to as a general role.In order to generate a prize for each role determined according to the game state, an internal lottery described later is won. Then, the winning flag of the role is stored in the RAM 41c. There needs to be constant.

  That is, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of this embodiment can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, and has a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified. A display result is derived and displayed on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R displayed in the transmissive area 51b, which is a variable display device capable of variable display, whereby one game is completed, and according to the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. This is a slot machine in which a prize can be generated and a number of medals (game media) corresponding to the generated prize are given to the player when the prize is generated.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  That is, the main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the present embodiment performs the process of carrying over the special role winning flag, and the main control unit 41 executing the process of carrying over the corresponding selection flag. , Carryover means are formed.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, and the combination numbers (0 to 19) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to combinations of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  In this slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the special bonus is a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a regular bonus, a small role is cherry, watermelon, 1 (1), 1 ( 2) One (3), Bell is replayed as a re-playing role. Also, as a combination of roles in slot machines 1, 1 ', 1 ", big bonus (1) + cherry, big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Regular Bonus + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Regular Bonus + Watermelon, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), regular bonus + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + 1 (2), big bonus (2) + 1 (2), regular +1 sheet bonus (2), Big bonus (1) +1 sheets (3), Big bonus (2) +1 sheets (3), +1 Like regular bonus (3) have been established. That is, the total of the combination of combinations and combinations is 25.

  In the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state, RT or a chance zone state (chance zone generation model only), or a regular bonus Depending on whether there are different combinations of combinations and combinations of combinations, and if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state, whether any special combination is being carried over (special combination) The combination of the combination and combination that is the subject of the lottery also depends on whether or not any special combination has already been set in the winning flag. It is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, it is possible to set a state number corresponding to the current gaming state, and to specify a combination to be a lottery object according to this state number Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when no special combination is carried over at RT, the state number is set. When “1” is set and any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “2” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over at RT If the state number is set to “3” and the bonus is a regular bonus, the state number is set to “4”. If no special role is carried over in the chance zone state, the state number is set to “ When 5 ”is set and any special role is carried over in the chance zone state,“ 6 ”is set as the state number. .

  As shown in FIG. 6, the game state is a normal game state, an RT or a chance zone state, and no special role is carried over, that is, “0”, “1” or “5” is set as the state number. Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Regular Bonus + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Regular Bonus + Watermelon, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Regular Bonus + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Regular Bonus + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + 1 ( ), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (3), Regular Bonus + 1 (3) Replay, Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), Bell, all roles The combination of the combination and the combination becomes the target of the internal lottery. Also, when the gaming state is a normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state, and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “2”, “3” or “6” In this case, replay, cherry, watermelon, 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), 1 sheet (3), bell, that is, a combination of a combination and combination after combination number 18 is a target of internal lottery. In addition, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, the state number is set to “4”, cherry, watermelon, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3), bell, ie, role The combination and combination of numbers after number 19 are subject to internal lottery.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and two medals are paid out in the normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state. In the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. If the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5. Since you won the cherry on the winning line, 4 medals will be paid out in the normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state, but in the regular bonus, you won the cherry on the 2 winning lines. Even so, since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out in one game is set to 15, only 15 medals are paid out. A watermelon is awarded when a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is available on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 5 medals are paid out in the normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state. In the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. One (1) wins when a combination of “Red 7-Bell-ANY (any can be any symbol)” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state. In the RT or chance zone state, one medal is paid out, and in the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. One (2) is awarded when the combination of “White 7-Bell-ANY” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one in the normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state. Medals are paid out, and 15 medals are paid out in the regular bonus. One (3) is awarded when the combination of “Black BAR-Bell-ANY” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one in the normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state. Medals are paid out, and 15 medals are paid out in the regular bonus. Bell is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 10 medals are paid out in the normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state. In the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, RT, or chance zone state. When a replay is won, the medals will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets no longer required to be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed and will always be 3) This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “black BAR-black BAR-red 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, RT, and chance zone state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state, the RT or the chance zone state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7” is arranged in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, RT and chance zone state. Wins a prize. In this embodiment, when the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is completed, the big bonus to be awarded is the big bonus (1), and the combination of “white 7-white 7-red 7” is prepared. The big bonus that is sometimes won is the big bonus (2). When the big bonus (1) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (1). When the transition to the big bonus (1) is made, the transition to the regular bonus is made at the same time as the transition to the big bonus (1). When the big bonus (1) is not finished when the regular bonus is finished, the transition is made to the regular bonus again. Then, it is controlled to the regular bonus repeatedly until the big bonus (1) ends. That is, during the big bonus (1), the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus (1) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus (1) exceeds 465. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the gaming state is the big bonus (1), the big bonus (1) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (2). When you move to Big Bonus (2), you will be transferred to Regular Bonus at the same time as Big Bonus (2). Then, it is controlled to the regular bonus repeatedly until the big bonus (2) ends. That is, during the big bonus (2), the regular bonus is always controlled as in the big bonus (1). The big bonus (2) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus (2) exceeds 300. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the gaming state is the big bonus (2), the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “white 7-white 7-red 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). Further, the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be collectively referred to simply as “bonus”.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the obtained random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a general combination and special combination are selected simultaneously. ) A range of determination values is specified, and winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won simultaneously (to be won in duplicate) is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn. Note that, as described above, simultaneous winning in which a general combination and a special combination are simultaneously won is also referred to as overlapping winning because a plurality of winning combinations are won.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the game state is referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the RT or the chance zone state, and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, “1” or “5” With reference to the winning combination table, the combinations of the combination of combination numbers 0 to 24 and combinations of combinations are sequentially read out as target combinations for internal lottery.

  Also, when the gaming state is a normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state, and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “2”, “3” or “6” In this case, the winning combination table is referred to, and the combinations of the combination of combination numbers 18 to 24 and combinations of combinations are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, when the state number is set to “4”, the winning combination table is referred to, and the combination of the combination of combination numbers 19 to 24 is sequentially set as the target combination of the internal lottery. Read out.

  In the internal lottery, when the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles and the state number indicating the current gaming state are added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows In addition, it is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  Then, when winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be selected is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c. Set. The internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is general. It is assigned as a general role storage work in which a winning flag for a role is set. Specifically, if any of the roles 0-2 is elected (special role), the winning flag of the special role indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the combination numbers 3 to 17 (special combination + general combination) is elected, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is elected is set in the special combination storing work. A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 18 to 24 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  That is, in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the present embodiment, the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R displayed in the transmissive area 51b serving as a variable display device are displayed. It is decided whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before being derived, and a special prize with a transition to a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), or a regular bonus that is advantageous to the player. Specific “Red 7—Red 7—Red 7”, “White 7—White 7—Red 7”, “Black BAR—Black BAR—Red 7” are permitted and specific prizes other than the special prize are specified. It is possible to simultaneously determine that the occurrence of a single winning combination of cherry, watermelon, and one piece (chance combination in Example 2 described later) is allowed, and a plurality of types of specific general winning cherries, Watermelon, one piece ( In the second embodiment described above, it is determined independently that the occurrence of a chance role) is allowed, and there are a plurality of cases involving a shift to the special bonus big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus. It is decided independently that the occurrence of the special prizes of “red 7-red 7-red 7”, “white 7-white 7-red 7”, and “black BAR-black BAR-red 7” is permitted. The setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 serving as the setting value selection means of the present invention are allowed to accept winnings at a rate according to the setting values (1 to 6) selected by the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38. The main control unit 41 that performs the internal lottery forms a pre-determining means.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing winning probabilities (theoretical values) of combinations of combinations and combinations for each set value when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT, or chance zone state.

  In this embodiment, when no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Regular Bonus + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Regular Bonus + Watermelon, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1)-(3), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1)-(3), Regular bonus + 1 (1)-(3), Replay, Cherry, Watermelon, 1 (1)-(3), Bell is subject to internal lottery, The approximate winning probabilities of these combinations and combinations of combinations are 1 / 1638.4, 1 / 1092.3, 1/54 when the set value is 6. .1, 1 / 5461.3, 1/4096, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 22730.7, 1/248, 1 / 11638.4, 1 / 2730.7, 1 / 1820.4, 1/4096 1 / 7.33, 1 / 52.5, 1/256, 1 / 25.1, 1 / 9.86. When the set value is 5, 1 / 1820.4, 1 / 11170.3, 1 / 585.1, 1 / 5461.3, 1/4096, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 3276.8, 1 /2340.6, 1 / 1820.4, 1 / 22730.7, 1 / 11820.4, 1/496, 1 / 7.33, 1 / 53.4, 1/256, 1 / 25.3, 1 /9.86. When the set value is 4, 1/248, 1 / 1260.3, 1 / 630.2, 1/8192, 1 / 5461.3, 1/4096, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 2340.6 1/2048, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 11820.4, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 7.33, 1 / 54.3, 1/260, 1 / 25.5, 1 / 9.86 It becomes. When the set value is 3, 1 / 2340.6, 1 / 11365.3, 1 / 682.7, 1/8192, 1 / 5461.3, 1/4096, 1/4096, 1 / 2730.7 1 / 2340.6, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 22730.7, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 7.33, 1 / 55.2, 1/260, 1 / 25.8, 1/9 .86. When the setting value is 2, 1 / 2730.7, 1 / 1488.5, 1 / 744.7, 1/16384, 1/8192, 1 / 5461.3, 1/4096, 1 / 2730.7, 1 /2730.7, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 2730.7, 1/8192, 1 / 7.33, 1 / 56.1, 1 / 264.3, 1 / 26.0, 1 / 9.86 It becomes. When the set value is 1, 1 / 3276.8, 1 / 11638.4, 1 / 819.2, 1/16384, 1/8192, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 5461.3, 1/3278 .8, 1 / 3278.8, 1 / 5461.3, 1 / 2730.7, 1/8192, 1 / 7.33, 1 / 57.1, 1 / 264.3, 1 / 26.3, 1 /9.86.

  When no special combination is carried over in RT, the replay winning probability is approximately 1 / 1.17 regardless of the set value.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is set as the number of sliding frames in the stop control table, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of 4 frames after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the number of sliding symbols to be drawn is determined so that the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the winning combination is not arranged. While a stop control table is created and reel stop control is performed, if none of the winning combinations are won, a stop control table is created in which the number of sliding frames that do not match any of the roles is defined, and the reel The stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed to align them and stop. The symbol of the winning combination will be controlled so as to be removed and stopped within a maximum of 4 frames.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 5, “Bell” and “Replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the winning flag for the bell and the replay is set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, for “watermelon”, there is a place where each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or more, that is, at intervals exceeding 4 frames, and the combination of watermelons is complete. If the stop operation is not performed within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line, the watermelon combinations cannot be aligned. For this reason, when a watermelon is won, if the left reel is stopped at a timing other than the 4-frame pull-in range, the combination of watermelons will not be aligned on any winning line, and will be missed.

  As for “Cherry”, there are places on the left reel that are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or more, that is, at intervals exceeding 4 frames, and the stop operation is performed in the drawing range of 4 frames with respect to the winning line where the combinations of cherries can be arranged. If you don't do it, you won't be able to make a cherry combination.

  Further, since only one “red 7”, “white 7”, and “black BAR” are arranged on the left reel, one (1), one (2), one (3) Unless a stop operation is performed within a drawing range of 4 frames with respect to a winning line where the combinations can be aligned, the combinations of 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3) cannot be aligned.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. In this embodiment, the chance is when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, or when Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3) is won. This is a display mode that can be derived.

  The reach eye is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the normal gaming state.

  Also, in this embodiment, if any bonus is won in the normal game state, RT or chance zone state, or cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), 1 (3) are won. In this case, regardless of the order in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, it is controlled so that chances can be derived, and in either the normal gaming state, RT, or chance zone state When the bonus is won, the reach is controlled to be derived regardless of the order in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. , Left, middle, right), the chance eyes and reach eyes may be derived on the condition that the operation of stopping each reel is performed.

  The slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of this embodiment have a plurality of models (types) depending on differences in replay time (RT), chance zone state transition (start) conditions, and end conditions. The model (type) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as for the model (type), after the bonus ends, the lottery probability for special roles (only when special roles are not carried over) and small roles are the same as in the normal gaming state, but the winning probability for replay is high. A model that is controlled by a replay time (RT) in which the expected increase / decrease rate of medals per game (the winning probability of the target combination x the total number of payouts / the number of bets required for one game) exceeds 1 (Type) and models (types) that are in a chance zone state in which the probability that a predetermined transition condition for transitioning to the replay time (RT) is satisfied after the bonus is finished is higher than the normal state.

  The probability that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied is higher than that in the normal state. For example, the predetermined transition condition is a winning of a specific small role, and the establishment that the small role wins is determined as the normal gaming state. It changes in the chance zone state and has a higher probability of winning in the chance zone state than in the normal gaming state. For example, when the transition condition is “Bell” winning, Although it does not change in the state and chance zone state, even if the bell wins in the normal game state, the transition probability to the replay time (RT) is set to “0%”, whereas it does not change in the chance zone state The probability of transition to replay time (RT) when Bell wins is set to “100%”. That only when the bell has been won, also include those to migrate to chance zone state.

  The presence / absence of the chance zone state (only RT occurs when none) is indicated by the most significant fifth digit symbol in the 5-digit RT type code shown in FIG. 8B. N ”symbol, and“ A ”symbol when there is a chance zone state.

  The model (type) that enters the chance zone state is the model (type) that enters the chance zone state again after the end of the replay time (RT) that has shifted from the chance zone state, that is, the start condition of the chance zone state is the replay time ( (RT) is re-entry type, and there are models (types) that transition to the normal gaming state after the replay time (RT) transitioned from the chance zone state. Whether these are re-entry types As shown in FIG. 8B, this is indicated by the fourth digit symbol in the 5-digit RT type code, and is “A” when the re-entry type, and “ N ”.

  Furthermore, the model (type) that is in the chance zone state has, as one of the start conditions of the chance zone state, a setting value change operation as a start condition in addition to the above-described bonus or replay time (RT) end. There are set value change rush models (types), and whether these are set value change rush models (types) or not is indicated by the third digit symbol in the 5-digit RT type code as shown in FIG. 8B. If it is a set value change rush model (type), it is a symbol “A”, and if it is not a set value change rush model (type), it is a symbol “N”.

  In addition, for models (types) that are in the chance zone state, there are different end conditions for the transitioned chance zone state. As the end condition for these chance zone states, [1] the number of games after the transition to the chance zone is specified. Reaching the number of games, [2] The falling role wins, [3] The number of games after the transition to the chance zone without winning the falling role reaches the specified number of games, or before reaching the specified number of games If the chance zone is ended under these end conditions, the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, all the chance zone states are also ended by winning the transitional role, so the winnings of the transitional role are excluded from the type items, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if there is a case where the chance zone state does not end even if the winning combination of these transitional combinations is awarded, the winning combination of these transitional combinations may be added to the type of end condition.

  The model (type) according to the end conditions of these chance zone states is indicated by the second digit symbol in the 5-digit RT type code as shown in FIG. 8B, and [1] to [[ 3]. For models that do not generate a chance zone, the value of the digit is set to [0].

  In addition, RT termination conditions for all models to be transferred are: (a) that a bonus is won after the transition to RT, (b) that the number of games after the transition to RT reaches the specified number of games, and (c) the bonus is Without winning, the number of games after RT transition reaches the specified number of games, or a bonus is won before reaching the specified number of games, (d) Bonus is won after transition to RT, or a faller wins a prize (E) The number of games after the transition to RT reaches the specified number of games without winning the winning combination, or the falling role wins before reaching the specified number of games, (f) The bonus is not won In addition, either the number of games after the transition to RT without reaching the specified number of games reaches the specified number of games, the bonus is won before the specified number of games is reached, or the falling number wins the prize , Models with these RT termination conditions Type), as shown in FIG. 8 (b), indicated by the first digit of the symbols in 5-digit RT type code, it is symbols above the end conditions (a) ~ (f).

  As described above, in this embodiment, there are various models (types) depending on combinations of the types (types) of the digits of the RT type code, and depending on these models (types), the replay time (RT ) Perform settings related to determination of start and end, and determination of start and end of the chance zone state.

  Depending on the type of slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ according to the present embodiment, the big bonus 1 and the big bonus 2 are finished and the setting change operation is performed to enter the chance zone state of a maximum of 20 games, and the regular bonus is finished. Due to the difference in the established transition conditions, the maximum number of different games ((10) is shifted to the chance zone state of 10 games, and the number of games between bonuses reaches 600 games. (The number of specified games) will be shifted to the chance zone state.

  In addition, the game control board 40 of the general type slot machine 1 used in the present embodiment has a calling lamp device 200, a collecting unit 50 and a signal cable 59 via an external output board 110 for inputting and outputting various signals. , A medal IN signal indicating the number of medals inserted, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals to be paid out, an RB signal indicating that a regular bonus is being played due to the occurrence of a regular bonus, and a big bonus BB1 signal indicating that the big bonus (1) is in the gaming state due to the occurrence of (1), BB2 signal indicating that the big bonus (2) is in the gaming state due to the occurrence of the big bonus (2), etc. The output signal is sent from the game control board 40 through the external output board 110 to the calling lamp device 200 and the collecting unit. It is outputted with respect to 50. (See Figure 11)

  In addition, the game control board 40 of the replay output type slot machine 1 ′ used in the present embodiment is connected to the calling lamp device 200 and the collecting unit 50 via the external output board 110 for inputting and outputting various signals. Connected via a cable 59, a medal IN signal indicating the number of inserted medals, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of paid out medals, an RB signal indicating that a regular bonus is being played due to the occurrence of a regular bonus, A BB1 signal indicating that the big bonus (1) is in the gaming state due to the occurrence of the big bonus (1), a BB2 signal indicating that the big bonus (2) is in the gaming state due to the occurrence of the big bonus (2), An external output signal such as a replay signal indicating the occurrence of a replay winning is sent from the game control board 40 to the external output board 110. And is output to the calling lamp 200 and collection unit 50 through. (See Figure 11)

  Further, the game control board 40 of the all-output type slot machine 1 ″ used in this embodiment is connected to the calling lamp device 200 and the collecting unit 50 via the external output board 110 for inputting and outputting various signals. Connected via a cable 59, a medal IN signal indicating the number of inserted medals, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of paid out medals, an RB signal indicating that a regular bonus is being played due to the occurrence of a regular bonus, A BB1 signal indicating that the big bonus (1) is in the gaming state due to the occurrence of the big bonus (1), a BB2 signal indicating that the big bonus (2) is in the gaming state due to the occurrence of the big bonus (2), External output signals such as a replay signal indicating the occurrence of a replay winning and a setting change signal indicating that a setting change operation has been performed And is output to the calling lamp unit 200 and the collection unit 50 via the external output board 110 from the gaming control board 40. (See FIG. 11)

  That is, signal input units 278a to 278c to be described later serving as information input means of the calling lamp device 200 and signal input units 581a to 581c of the first port 581 to the fourth port 584 to be described later serving as information input means of the collection unit 50. , 582a to 582c, 583a to 583c, 584a to 584c, BB1 signal, BB2 signal, which are special winning combination generation information that can identify the type of special winning combination generated in the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, The RB signal is input.

  The medal IN signal output from the external output board 110 of this embodiment is output for each game as shown in FIG. 12B, and the medal IN signal is operated by the start switch 7. The medal OUT signal is output at the time when the medal payout is performed only when a winning occurs in the game and there is a medal payout.

  That is, the medal IN signal corresponds to game execution information that can specify that the game has been executed in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, and the medal OUT signal corresponds to the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′. 1 ”corresponds to the grant information that can specify the number of game media to be awarded according to the winning.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12A, the BB1 signal, BB2 signal, and RB signal output from the external output board 110 according to the present embodiment correspond to the gaming states of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. Thus, the gaming state of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ can be specified by the output state of each of these signals. However, since the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal are not output from the normal gaming state, the replay time (RT), and the chance zone state, the normal gaming state, the replay time (RT), and the chance zone state are distinguished. I can't do it.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12A, when the gaming state of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is a normal gaming state, a replay time (RT) and a chance zone state, the BB1 signal, Since both the BB2 signal and the RB signal are in the “OFF” state and the bet number in that case is 3, as described above, a 3-pulse signal is output as the medal IN signal at the start of the game.

  When the gaming state of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is a big bonus (1), the BB1 signal is “ON”, the BB2 signal is “OFF”, and the BB1 signal As shown in the timing chart at the bottom of FIG. 12A, the RB signal is temporarily turned off at the end of the regular bonus, but a predetermined time (wt) has elapsed. As a result, the “ON” state is immediately set. Since the bet number in this case is 1, as described above, a 1-pulse signal is output as the medal IN signal at the start of the game.

  When the gaming state of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is a big bonus (2), the BB2 signal is “ON”, the BB1 signal is “OFF”, and the BB2 signal As shown in the timing chart at the bottom of FIG. 12A, the RB signal is temporarily turned off at the end of the regular bonus, but a predetermined time (wt) has elapsed. As a result, the “ON” state is immediately set. Since the bet number in this case is 1, as described above, a 1-pulse signal is output as the medal IN signal at the start of the game.

  In addition, when the gaming state of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is a regular bonus, the RB signal is turned “ON”, while the BB1 signal and the BB2 signal are kept “OFF”. . Since the bet number in this case is 1, as described above, a 1-pulse signal is output as the medal IN signal at the start of the game.

  That is, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ according to the present embodiment has a predetermined model based on a medal (game medium) for one game, such as a model that generates the above-described chance zone state. By setting the number of bets, the game can be started, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device including the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the transmissive area 51b that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other. One game is completed by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device. When a winning occurs, the number of medals (game media) corresponding to the generated winning is obtained. A replay winning combination that can be replayed without setting a new wager is generated on condition that a bonus or rush entering a predetermined special winning combination is given to the player. A chance zone state in which the probability that a predetermined transition condition for shifting to a highly likely replay time (replay time state) is established is higher than that in the normal state, and the replay time entry combination wins a prize ( This includes a model that shifts to the replay time state on the condition that the transition condition is satisfied.

  Further, the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of this embodiment all generate replay time, provided that a bonus to become a predetermined special winning combination is allowed by an internal winning. In addition, there is a model that is in a chance zone state with a high probability of transition to a replay time state in which a replay winning combination that can be replayed without setting a new bet is likely to occur, and the probability of transition This includes models that are 100% and are always in the replay time state.

  In addition, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the present embodiment has a new model (type) on condition that a bonus that becomes a predetermined special winning combination is generated, like the re-entry type model described above. The probability that a predetermined transition condition for shifting to a replay time (replay time state) that is likely to cause a replay winning combination that can be replayed without setting a bet number is established is higher than in the normal state An increased chance zone state is entered, and a transition is made to the replay time (replay time state) on the condition that the transition condition is satisfied in the chance zone state, and the chance is again after the end of the replay time (replay time state). Includes models that are in a zoned state.

  Next, the call lamp device 200 used in the present embodiment will be described. The call lamp device 200 of the present embodiment is provided at the upper position on the side surface of the game island so as to be opened and closed as shown in FIGS. The display unit 209 is attached to the lamp plate, and the control unit 300 is provided separately from the display unit 209 and includes a control board 270 connected to the display unit 209 by a connection cable 271.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the display unit 209 used in this embodiment has a structure in which a display substrate 260 is housed in a housing made up of a base body 280 and a cover body 250 that covers the top of the base body 280. The cover body 250 is integrated by engaging engagement claws 281 erected at both end positions of the base body 280 with engagement holes 254 formed on the side surface of the cover body 250. 282 in the figure are columnar protrusions for fixing the four corners of the display substrate 260 with screws.

  An opening 251 is formed on the front surface of the cover body 250 so that the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 266 mounted on the display substrate 260 can be seen from the outside. Further, input buttons 255a to 255d that can be operated by the player and a receiving window 257 that transmits infrared rays from a corresponding remote controller (not shown) are formed near the lower part of the outer periphery of the opening 251. On the upper surface 260a of the display substrate 260, input switches 262a to 262d corresponding to the input buttons 255a to 255d and a receiving unit 265 for receiving an infrared signal from the remote controller are mounted.

  In addition, on both the left and right sides of the cover body 250, notification lamp cover portions 250a formed of red, yellow, and blue transparent resin materials are formed from the upper side of the cover body 250, and the upper surface 260a of the display substrate 260 is formed. The light bulbs 267 are mounted symmetrically at positions corresponding to the respective colors of the notification lamp cover portion 250a, and the notification lamp is formed by the notification lamp cover portion 250a and the light bulb 267.

  The liquid crystal display device 266 mounted on the display substrate 260 has a display screen 261 formed by arranging a liquid crystal (LCD) panel 263, which will be described later, as a flat display so as to face the opening 251 of the cover body 250. 261 displays game information such as the number of regular bonuses, the number of big bonuses and the number of games between bonuses of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ to which the calling lamp device 200 is connected, and the display screen 261. In the lower display area on the player side, input menus corresponding to the input buttons 255a to 255d are displayed at respective positions facing the input buttons 255a to 255d.

  The LCD panel 263 used in this embodiment is a dot matrix LCD panel capable of full color display, and can display various characters, numbers, graphs, and the like in various display colors.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a dot matrix LCD panel is used as a display panel for forming the display screen 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display screen 261 is, for example, an EL panel. Alternatively, an LED panel, a fluorescent tube display device, or a segment display may be used.

  In addition, a transparent touch panel (not shown) is provided on the upper portion of the LCD panel 263, and position information that can specify the position selected by the player on the screen is output to the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of the control board 270. As a result, the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 can identify the position selected by the player and perform processing according to the content displayed at the selected position.

  Further, an EL backlight 295 is disposed at the lower part of the LCD panel 263, and surface emission is performed by connecting a driver circuit 294 that supplies a predetermined high frequency power to the EL backlight 295, and the LCD panel 263 is moved downward. The LCD panel 263 and the EL backlight 295 are arranged on a base 298 installed on the display substrate 260, and polycarbonate as a transparent protective member that covers the front surface of the LCD panel 263. The engagement protrusions 291 provided on the plate 290 are engaged with the engagement grooves provided at the four corners of the base 298, so that the LCD panel 263 and the EL backlight 295 are sandwiched and integrated. The polycarbonate plate 290 can be easily attached and detached by removing the engaging protrusion 291 in this way. Going on. The driver circuit 294 is connected to the control microcomputer 279 via the connection port 272 (see FIG. 10), and the lighting of the EL backlight 295 is controlled by the control microcomputer 279.

  The LCD panel 263 is connected to the control microcomputer 279 via the LCD driver 264 mounted on the lower surface 260b of the display substrate 260 and the connection port 272 (see FIG. 10), and is based on display data output from the control microcomputer 279. The display is displayed on the LCD panel 263. The control microcomputer 279 is connected to the input switches 262a to 262 through the connection port 272. When the input buttons 255a to d are operated and the input switches 262a to 262d are input, The processes corresponding to the input switches 262a to 262d on each screen are performed.

  The LCD driver 264 also incorporates the above-described transparent touch panel drive (driver) circuit, and the above-described position specifying information is transmitted to the control microcomputer 279 via the LCD driver 264 and the connection port 272 (see FIG. 10). Is output.

  In addition, the receiving unit 265 is an infrared signal transmitted from a remote controller (not shown) operated by a store clerk of the game hall, for example, “Decision (OK)”, “No (NG)”, “Up”, “ By receiving a predetermined signal corresponding to “down”, etc., converting the received signal into a predetermined data string and outputting it to a control microcomputer 279 described later, the control microcomputer 279 is selected by the remote controller. (OK) "," impossible (NG) "," up "," down ", and other operation contents can be grasped.

  Further, a lighting control circuit 268 that performs lighting control such as lighting and extinguishing of the light bulb 267 is mounted on the lower surface 260b of the display substrate 260, and the lighting control circuit 268 is also connected via the connection port 272 (see FIG. 10). The lighting control circuit 268 is connected to the control microcomputer 279, and the lighting control circuit 268 controls the lighting of each light bulb 267 based on the instruction data of the control microcomputer 279, so that the control microcomputer 279 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the left and right colors. Can do. In this embodiment, the control microcomputer 279 outputs lighting control data in a predetermined format indicating the lighting and extinguishing of each bulb 267 and the state of repetition timing to the lighting control circuit 268, so that the lighting control circuit 268 Lighting and extinction that match the lighting control data are performed.

  The LCD driver 264, the lighting control circuit 268, the driver circuit 294, the input switches 262a to 262d, and the receiving unit 265 provided in the display unit 209 are provided from the lower surface 260b of the display substrate 260 as shown in FIG. The control cable 271 is connected to the control board 270 by a connection cable 271 that is led out and led out through an opening 283 formed in a substantially central portion of the base 280.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the control board 270 includes a connection port 272 for exchanging various signals with various devices and circuits provided in the display unit 209, and a calling lamp device 200. Is stored, a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that performs various controls according to the program, a game information table shown in FIG. 16, and a game state history table shown in FIG. And nonvolatile microcomputer 276 storing various setting information (including various data files attached, corresponding slot machine role configuration and payout number data, etc.) transmitted from hall computer 140, and control microcomputer (MPU) 279 is used for storage in various control processes executed by the 279, and FIG. A RAM 275 having various counters such as a small role game counter, a digest game number counter, a display counter (not shown), and the like, a dip switch 277 for inputting initial settings in the calling lamp device 200, time information and A real-time clock (RTC) 273 that outputs calendar information is provided.

  The control board 270 supplies an operation clock to the power supply circuit that supplies the control board 270 and the display unit 209 by converting the AC power supplied from the power source into a DC operation power supply, and the control microcomputer (MPU) 279. And a reset circuit for resetting the control microcomputer (MPU) 279.

  Further, the control board 270 of the present embodiment has a communication unit 269 for performing data communication with the hall computer 140 via the relay unit 60, and a setting transmitted from the hall computer 140 through the communication unit 269. Information can be received (see FIG. 11).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the control board 270 is provided with seven signal input units 278a to 278g and two signal input / output units 278L to 278R, and the signal input units 278a, 278b, 278c, 278d, 278e, 278f, and 278g, BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, and replay signal (slot machines 1 ′, 1 ″ only) output from the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, respectively. ), A setting change signal (slot machine 1 ″ only) is input, and each signal input is detected in the signal input units 278a, 278b, 278c, 278d, 278e, 278f, 278g, and the output corresponding to the signal detection is controlled. The data is output to a microcomputer (MPU) 279.

  That is, the signal input units 278a to 278f of the present embodiment include a BB1 signal, a BB2 signal, an RB signal, a medal OUT signal, a replay signal, and a replay time, which are special winning combination generation information that can specify the occurrence of a special winning combination. The medal OUT signal and the replay signal, which are replay time transition information that can specify the transition to the state, are input.

  In addition, in the signal input units 278a to 278f serving as information input means of the present embodiment, in the case of the slot machine 1, only the medal OUT signal that is the grant information that can specify the number of game media to be awarded in accordance with the winning is provided. However, for the slot machines 1 ′ and 1 ″, both the medal OUT signal and the replay signal serving as the replay winning information indicating that the replay winning has occurred are input.

  In addition, in the signal input units 278a to 278f serving as information input means of the present embodiment, a medal IN signal serving as bet amount information capable of specifying the bet amount, and the number of medals (the number of game media) awarded in accordance with winnings. ) Is a special winning period specifying information that can specify a period during which a bonus bonus (1), a big bonus (2), and a regular bonus are generated. In addition to the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal, a replay signal serving as replay winning information indicating that a replay winning has occurred is input.

  Further, the signal input units 278a to 278f serving as information input means of the present embodiment are used for chance zone start determination as chance zone period specifying information that can specify the period of the chance zone state, as will be described later. The medal OUT signal, the medal IN signal used for the end determination of the chance zone by digesting the prescribed number of games, the medal OUT signal used for the end determination of the chance zone by winning the falling role, and the chance zone by the end of the bonus The BB1 signal, BB2 signal, and RB signal used for the start determination are input.

  Further, the signal input units 278a to 278f serving as information input means of the present embodiment include a BB1 signal, a BB2 signal, an RB signal, and replay time (replay time) serving as special winning combination generation information that can specify the generation of a special winning combination. A medal that becomes the chance zone end specifying information that can specify the end of the chance zone state due to the completion of the prescribed number of games and the winning of the falling role, which is the end condition other than the transition to the time state) IN signal, medal OUT signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal, BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, which are replay time period information that can specify the transition to and end of the replay time (replay time state) Is entered.

  In the signal input units 278a to 278g according to the present embodiment, which of the multiple types of special prizes associated with the transition to the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus has occurred. BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, which are special prize information that can identify the specific prizes, and a specific general prize among a plurality of types of specific general prizes, such as cherry, watermelon, and one-piece combination, has occurred A medal OUT signal that is possible specific general winning information and a medal IN signal that is game information that can specify that a game has been executed in the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, and 1 ″ are input.

  In the present invention, “a game is played” indicates that one game is started and ended in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″.

  Further, in the signal input units 278a to 278g of the present embodiment, a BB1 signal, a BB2 signal, an RB signal, and a medal that are game related information generated in association with the game in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. An IN signal and a medal OUT signal are input.

  On the other hand, the signal input / output units 278L and 278R are connected to the signal input / output units 278L and 278R of the adjacent call lamp device 200, and all the call lamp devices 200 installed on one surface of the game island are interconnected. These signal input / output units 278L and 278R perform running lighting in which the calling lamp devices 200 on one side of the game islands connected to each other are sequentially turned on when a bonus is generated. When the running signal is output from both of the signal input / output units 278L and 278R (that is, both the left and right) and the running signal is input from the adjacent call lamp device 200, the input of the running signal is detected. The output corresponding to the signal detection is output to the control microcomputer (MPU) 279, so that the control manager In the running lighting process performed by the control unit (MPU) 279, all the light bulbs 267 are turned on once, and the signal input / output units 278L and 278R on the side opposite to the running signal input side (the input side when termination is set) are provided. A running signal is output.

  Further, a dip switch 277 is mounted on the control board 270 of the present embodiment. In the dip switch 277, settings for performing various settings on the calling lamp device 200 side or the hall computer 140 are set. In addition, it is possible to set the number of times of running and the termination setting in cooperation with each of the connected call lamp devices 200. In the present embodiment, since the hall computer 140 is connected to each call lamp device 200, these dip switches 277 are set to perform various settings on the hall computer 140 side.

  Also, in the RAM 275 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, a big bonus (1) which is a special prize among the general roles (general prizes) generated in the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. , Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus and Duplicate Winning (simultaneous Winning) Each small role that is a common role, specifically, Cherry, Watermelon, and 1 Sheet Role will be associated with each small role winning A small role game counter is provided for storing the number of games since then, so that the number of games since the occurrence of each small role winning can be counted and counted by the small role game counter. It has become.

  In other words, in the small role game counter of the present embodiment, the occurrence of a specific general winning cherry, watermelon, one-piece winning is specified in the Sh3 step of the payout-related processing described later, which is a specific general winning occurrence specifying means. The number of games is counted, and a game number counting means is constituted by the small role game counter.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the RAM 275 of the present embodiment associates the RT (replay time) generated in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ and the chance zone state with the RT ( (Replay time) or a chance game state counter is provided for storing the number of digested games that have been executed after entering the chance zone state, and the RT (replay time) or chance zone state is established by the digest game number counter. The number of digestion games from can be counted (counted).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the RAM 275 of the present embodiment stores the latest game table in which the game contents and the like of the most recent games up to a predetermined number (20 in the present embodiment) from the previously executed game are stored. Has been.

  In the latest game table, the game execution time (medal IN signal input time), the number of bets, the number of payouts, the presence / absence of a replay winning, The base up to a predetermined number of games (number of games to be calculated) set on an RT-related setting screen (see FIG. 28) described later and the RT-related setting screen (see FIG. 28) described later from the game are set. The replay occurrence rate up to a predetermined number of games (the number of games to be calculated) is stored, and the game content up to the last 20 games excluding the bonus game and the number of games to be calculated before each game is the latest game The base value and the replay occurrence rate can be grasped. That is, the base value and the replay occurrence rate are not affected by the game being bonused.

  Further, the EEPROM 276 of this embodiment stores a game information table shown in FIG. 16 and a game state history table shown in FIG. The game information table of this embodiment stores game information for three days including today, that is, today's data, previous day data, and previous day data. Of these data, today's data is also stored in the RAM 275 so that it can be read out at a higher speed than that read from the EEPROM 276. Data is also automatically updated.

  In the game information table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the game state at that time (only data for the current day, normal, chance, RT, BB1, BB2, RB) and the number of medals IN signal input are shown. Cumulative total number of games, number of games between bonuses (only today's data) from previous big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) or regular bonus, and big bonus (1) from the start of business Number of occurrences BB (1) The number of occurrences, the number of times that the big bonus (1) from the start of business and the cherry small role are determined to be won simultaneously, Cherry-BB (1) the number of duplicated winnings, and the start of business The number of times that the Big Bonus (1) from the time point and the watermelon small role have been won simultaneously is the number of times that the watermelon-BB (1) is won, and 1 bonus that is the number of times that one of the bonuses (1) and one of the winning combinations (1) to (3) is determined to be won at the same time-BB (1) The number of duplicate winnings and the big bonus from the start of business (2) BB (2) occurrence count that is the cumulative occurrence count, and Cherry-BB (2) duplicate win count that is the number of times that the big bonus (2) from the start of business and the cherry small role have been won simultaneously, Watermelon-BB (2), which is the number of times the Big Bonus from the start of business (2) and the watermelon small role have been elected at the same time, and the Big Bonus from the start of business (2) and a single role (1)-(3) One of the number of times identified as having been simultaneously elected-BB (2) The number of duplicate winnings, the number of RB occurrences of the regular bonus since the start of business, From the start of business The number of times that the regular bonus and the cherry small role have been elected simultaneously is the number of times that the Cherry-RB is won, and the regular bonus from the start of the business and the watermelon small role is the number of times that the watermelon is identified. The number of duplicate winnings, the regular bonus from the start of business, and the number of times that one of the winning combinations (1) to (3) is identified as one simultaneous winning-RB overlapping winnings, The number of cherry wins, which is the cumulative number of cherry small roles, and the number of times that a big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus and double winning (simultaneous winning) of these cherry wins (that is, cherry-BB) (1) Duplicate Winning Count and Cherry-BB (2) Duplicated Winning Count and Cherry-RB Duplicated Winning Count) -Number of wins, number of watermelon wins, which is the total number of watermelon small occurrences since the start of business, and the number of wins that overlap with Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), or Regular Bonus. (In other words, the total number of watermelon-BB (1) duplicate wins, watermelon-BB (2) duplicate wins, and watermelon-RB duplicates wins) 1)-(3) is the cumulative number of occurrences, and the number of times of winning the double bonus (1), big bonus (2) or regular bonus among these 1 -BB (1) Overlap win count and 1-BB (2) Overlap win count and 1-Total of RB overlap win count) and the medal IN signal The total number of medals that have been accumulated since the start of business, the total number of medals that have been accumulated since the start of business based on the medal OUT signal, the total number of medals and total medals The number of difference medals, which is the difference from the number, the estimated setting values of the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ estimated in the setting value estimation process described later, and the number of RT occurrences from the start of business. The total number of RTs, the total number of CZs, which is the number of chance zone occurrences since the start of business, and the RTs that have entered (occurred) in the chance zone (CZ) due to the end of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) The number of RTs during BB-CZ which is the number of times, the number of RTs during RB-CZ which is the number of RTs transferred (generated) during the chance zone (CZ) due to the end of the regular bonus, 1 unit average TY which is an average value of acquired medals in each 1 unit specified in the 1 unit determination process (see FIG. 39) to be performed, and 1 unit average RT number which is an average value of RTs generated in each 1 unit Are stored, and the game information is input processing, payout processing, replay time (RT) determination processing, chance zone determination processing, which will be described later, which are performed by inputting various signals to the signal input units 278a to 278g. The information is sequentially updated to the latest information by the game state identification process, the set value estimation process, and the like.

  That is, in the game information table of the present embodiment, the special prize occurrence identification of the present invention is performed during the overlapping winning determination period until five games, which are the predetermined number of games, are counted by the small role game counter constituting the game number counting means. Special winnings that have been identified by the game state specifying process that is the means, that is, the number of occurrences of the special winnings that are determined to be the double winning special prize by the gaming state specifying process that is the duplicate winning special winning determination means The number of times of winning a prize for each type of general winning a prize, that is, the number of times of winning a double winning cherry, the number of times of winning of a winning watermelon, the number of times of winning of a duplicate winning, and the number of times of special winning Number of winning prizes, Cherry-BB1 double wins, Cherry-BB2 double wins, Cherry-RB double wins, Watermelon-BB Duplicate winning count, watermelon-BB2 overlapping winning count, watermelon-RB overlapping winning count, 1 sheet-BB1 overlapping winning count, 1 sheet-BB2 overlapping winning count, 1 sheet-RB overlapping winning count, and game information The table constitutes means for counting the number of special winning prizes that are won in duplicate.

  Further, in the game information table of the present embodiment, the number of occurrences for each type of the specific general prize, the occurrence of which has been identified by the Sh3 step of the payout-related processing described later, which is a specific general prize occurrence identification means. The number of cherry wins, the number of watermelon wins, and the number of wins for one sheet are tabulated, and the game information table constitutes a specific general win count counting means.

  In the game information table of the present embodiment, based on the input of the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, the RB signal, the medal IN signal, and the medal OUT signal that are the game related information input to the signal input units 278a to 278g, The number of games, the number of BB1, the number of BB2, the number of RBs, the number of cherry winnings, and the number of winnings for one sheet are tabulated, and each number of times tabulated in the setting value estimation process Ss2 shown in FIG. Each probability specified in the setting value estimation game information setting item on the duplicate winning-related setting screen described later, which is evaluation information for evaluating the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ based on the information (BB1 probability, BB2 probability, RB probability, cherry probability, one-piece winning probability) are calculated, and Ss of the game information table and the setting value estimation process Evaluation information collecting unit is configured by step.

  Further, in the game information table of the present embodiment, the previous day setting value estimated in the step Ss4 of the setting value estimation process serving as the setting value estimating means on the previous day is stored as the previous day data. Thus, the previous day set value storage means is formed.

  Further, in the game information table of the present embodiment, the double winning special prize of the present invention is used during the double winning determination period until the predetermined number of games is counted by the small role game counter constituting the game number counting means. The number of duplicate winning special winnings, which is the number of occurrences of special winnings determined to be duplicate winning special winnings determined to be allowed to be generated at the same time as the specific general winnings by the gaming state specifying process as the judging means, Occurrence is identified by the number of duplicate winning special prizes for each type of specific general prize and the number of duplicate winning special prizes for each type of special prize, and the game state identification process that is a special prize occurrence identification means outside the duplicate prize determination period It is possible to specify the number of single winning special winnings, which is the number of occurrences of special winnings that are determined as single winning special winnings by means of the duplicate winning special winning determining means BB1 number, Cherry-BB1 overlapping winning number, Watermelon-BB1 overlapping winning number, 1 sheet-BB1 overlapping winning number, and BB2 number, Cherry-BB2 overlapping winning number, Watermelon-BB2 overlapping The number of wins, 1-BB2 double wins, and the number of RBs, cherry-RB doubles wins, watermelon-RB doubles wins, 1-RB doubles wins are counted. The number-of-winnings specifying information counting means is configured.

  In the game information table of this embodiment, the total number of CZs, which is the number of times that the chance zone state has been determined to have occurred, and the number of times that it has been determined that the state has shifted to the replay time state. The total number of RTs as the number of times of time transition, the number of BB1 times, the number of BB2 times, the number of RBs as the number of occurrences of the chance zone for each type of special winning combination, the number of RTs during BB-CZ and the number of RB-CZs as the number of times of replay time transition The number of times is totaled, and the game information table constitutes a totaling means.

  That is, by subtracting the cherry-BB1 duplicated winning count, the watermelon-BB1 duplicated winning count, and the one-BB1 duplicated winning count from the BB1 counted in the game information table, the BB1 independent winning count is obtained, and the BB2 counted count is obtained. Subtract the Cherry-BB2 double win count, the watermelon-BB2 double win count, and the 1-BB2 double win count from the BB2 single win count, and the Cherry-RB double win count and the watermelon-RB count from the RB count. By subtracting the number of duplicated winnings and the number of 1-RB duplicated winnings, the number of RB single winnings can be obtained. By counting each of these winnings, the number of overlapping winnings and the number of single winnings for each special prize is calculated. Therefore, each of these winning times corresponds to the winning type special winning number specifying information in the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, as the winning type special winning number specifying information, the overlapping winning number for each special winning (cherry-BB1 overlapping winning number, cherry-BB2 overlapping winning number, cherry-RB overlapping winning number, watermelon-BB1 overlapping number) Number of wins, watermelon-BB2 double wins, watermelon-RB double wins, 1-BB1 double wins, 1-BB2 double wins, 1-RB double wins) The number of winning prizes (BB1, BB2, RB) can be used to specify the number of single winnings by calculation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each special prize is conversely. By counting and using the number of individual winnings for each special prize and the total number of special winnings for each special prize, the number of duplicate winnings for each special prize may be specified by calculation. Special And duplicate the winning number for each prize, it is also possible to aggregate and single winning number for each special pay. When the number of independent winnings for each special prize is counted, in the steps S5, S15 and S23 of the gaming state specifying process shown in FIG. When it is determined that it is not within 5 games), the special prize is determined to be a single winning prize, and is counted by adding 1 to the number of single winnings of the corresponding special prize (BB1, BB2, or RB). Just do it.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the display, the number of overlapping special winnings for each special winning (the number corresponding to the display of each small role) and the number of special winnings alone (“single” ”And the total number of special winning prizes (the number corresponding to the“ total ”display) are totaled (calculated) and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, as described above, by counting and displaying at least two of the special winning duplicate winning count, the special winning single winning count, and the total special winning winning count, One winning number can be calculated and specified by the player. Therefore, as the winning type special winning number specifying information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 266 as the winning type special winning number display means, the special winning overlap Number of winners and special prize Of the three of the winning number of the winning number and the total special prize winning number of times, it may be configured in at least two of the winning number of times.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, the gaming state history table of the present embodiment stores the gaming state history (data by state) for the past four days, the highest day of the day, the day before, the day before the last day, and each day. In addition, the gaming state (normal; normal gaming state, BB1; big bonus 1, BB2; big bonus 2, RB; regular bonus, RT; replay time, chance; chance zone state) and the number of occurrences (n), and the gaming state Occurrence time, unit number of one unit to which the gaming state belongs, the total number of games at the time of occurrence of the gaming state, the number of games during the gaming state, and the total number of medals inserted at the time of occurrence of the gaming state The number of medals inserted during the gaming state, the total number of medals paid out when the gaming state occurs, the number of medals paid out during the gaming state, and the difference medal during the gaming state And - (payout medal number turned medal number), the state-specific data (game state history) made of a corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ', and is stored in the order generated in the 1 ".

  In this way, according to the gaming state history table, the occurrence state of all the gaming states generated in the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the number of games executed in each gaming state, and the difference in the gaming state In addition to grasping the number of medals, by summing the duration of one unit, the type of gaming state included in one unit, the occurrence status of one unit, and the difference medal number of each gaming state included in the one unit, The number of medals for each unit (the number of medals earned; TY) and the average thereof can be grasped, the number of unit bonuses and the average can be grasped from the number of bonuses contained in one unit, and RT ( The number of unit loops and their average can be grasped from the number of (replay times).

  In other words, in the gaming state history table of the present embodiment, it is determined as one unit (one unit period) determined (specified) in one unit determination processing (to be described later) serving as one unit period specifying means, that is, one unit. Then, the number of unit acquired medals (unit TY), which is the sum of the number of difference medals, which is the difference between the number of bets and the number of granted game media in the state-specific data in which the same unit number is stored, is tabulated.

  Further, in the gaming state history table of the present embodiment, the chance zone state generated in one unit (one unit period) specified as one unit by storing the same unit number in the one-unit determination process described later. , Data for each state serving as occurrence status specifying information capable of specifying the occurrence status of replay time (replay time status) and various bonuses (special winning combination) is stored, and the occurrence status specifying information storage means is stored in the game status history table. Is formed.

  This gaming state history table is initialized by performing the gaming state history table initialization process shown in FIG. 38 in the starting process performed when the calling lamp device 200 is started.

  In the game state history table initialization process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, first, a game state history carry-over process is performed (Sy0).

  Specifically, in this carry-over process, it is confirmed whether or not the date output from the RTC 273 has been changed. If it has been changed, the date is stored as the carry-over date of the gaming state history, and After the data is changed to the previous day and the previous day's data is changed to the previous day, the process proceeds to step Sy1 to reset all the gaming state history (state-specific data) stored as today's data.

  Then, the process proceeds to the Sy2 step and, as will be described later, is the all-output type slot machine 1 ″ that outputs a setting change signal based on the RT-related setting information transmitted and stored from the hall computer 140? Determine whether or not.

  If it is determined in the determination that the slot machine 1 ″ is an all-output type slot machine that outputs a setting change signal, the process proceeds to step Sy6, the gaming state at the start of business is estimated as the normal state, and the gaming state history table “Normal” is registered as the game state of the first state-specific data in today's data, and the process ends (Sy7).

  For these all-output type slot machines 1 ″, when a setting change operation is performed before the start of business and a setting change signal is output, the setting change signal is output at step SK5 in the interrupt processing described later. Is detected and the corresponding slot machine 1 ″ is of the setting change entry type (when the setting change operation is checked as the occurrence condition of the chance zone state), the step SK25 described later is performed. As a result, the gaming state of the first state-specific data is changed from “normal” to “chance”.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Sy2 that it is not an all-output type slot machine 1 "that outputs a setting change signal, the process proceeds to step Sy3, and whether the setting change operation is checked as a chance zone state occurrence condition. Is determined based on the RT-related setting information.

  If the setting change operation is not checked, the process proceeds to the above-described Sy6 step, while if the setting change operation is checked, the process proceeds to the Sy4 step. It is estimated that a chance zone state has been reached due to the previous setting change operation, and the game state (current) in the game information table is updated to “chance” and 1 is added to the total number of CZ occurrences. Then, “chance” indicating the chance zone state is stored as the gaming state of the first state-specific data in the today state data of the gaming state history table.

  Furthermore, based on the RT related setting information, the setting content of “Termination Chance Zone Setting” is specified, and when “Termination Chance Zone Setting” is set to “Include”, the “Unit” item contains a unit number. When “1” is stored and the start of one unit including the chance zone state is set, if “not included” is set, the process ends without storing anything.

  That is, the setting change operation is checked as a chance zone generation condition on the RT-related setting screen (operation entry model setting means) in the hall computer 140 described later, that is, it is set to be an operation entry type slot machine. Thus, even in the general type slot machine 1 and the replay output type slot machine 1 ′ to which the setting change signal is not output, the date is different when the calling lamp device 200 is activated, that is, it is activated at a different date. Is determined to be in the chance zone state, and the determined chance zone state is registered as the gaming state of the first state-specific data in the today's data in the gaming state history table. , If “End Chance Zone Setting” is set to “Include” Includes a chance zone state in which the start is determined to be included in one unit (one unit period), and the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that executes the gaming state history table initialization process determines the determination means and one unit. A period specifying means is formed.

  Next, the collecting unit 50 used in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 11, the collecting unit 50 has one collecting unit for four slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. The unit 50 is arranged, and each signal output from each of the four slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is input to one collecting unit 50, and each slot machine 1 is the same as the calling lamp device 200. 1 ′, 1 ″ of various game information, and game status including table game information data including various game information related to the totaled slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ and game state history (data by state) By transmitting history data to the hall computer 140 via the relay unit 60, the hall computer 140 centrally manages the gaming information and gaming state history of each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. It has been cut way.

  In the present embodiment, a mode in which the relay unit 60 is used to enable installation of a large number of collecting units 50 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it connect the collection unit 50 and the hall computer 140 directly, without going through.

  Here, the configuration of the collection unit 50 used in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 18A. The collection unit 50 has four ports from a first port 581 to a fourth port 584. The slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ are connected to the four ports 581 to 584, respectively, so that four slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ can be connected to one collection unit 50. It has become.

  Each of these four ports 581 to 584 is connected to a control microcomputer (MPU) 579 for controlling the operation of the collection unit 50, and the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 inputs a signal to each port 581 to 584. The presence or absence can be detected.

  The control microcomputer (MPU) 579 includes a program for performing various controls executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 579, a unit ID of the collection unit 50, and a slot machine 1 connected to the ports 581 to 584. 1 ′, 1 ″ machine number, gaming information table shown in FIG. 22, gaming state history table shown in FIG. 23, and various settings for each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ transmitted from the hall computer 140 Non-volatile EEPROM 576 in which information and the like (including the slot machine corresponding to each port and the number of payouts) are stored, and used for storage in various control processes executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 In addition, the small role game counter shown in FIG. 19, the digest game number counter shown in FIG. 20, and the latest game counter shown in FIG. Are connected to a RAM 575 that stores the data table, a real-time clock (RTC) 573 that outputs time information and calendar information at that time, and a communication unit 569 for performing data communication with the relay unit 60. The above-mentioned table game information data and game state history data having the configuration of each transmission data sequence shown in FIG.

  Each port 581 to 584 is provided with seven signal input portions 581a to 581g as illustrated in the port 581 in FIG. 18A, and the signal input portions 581a, 581b, 581c, 581d, BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, and replay signal (slot machines 1 ′, 1 ″ only) output from the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ respectively. ), A setting change signal (only slot machine 1 ″) is input, and each signal input is detected in the signal input units 281a, 281b, 281c, 281d, 281e, 581f, and 581g, and the output corresponding to the signal detection is controlled. The data is output to a microcomputer (MPU) 279.

  That is, in the ports 581 to 584 of this embodiment, the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, the RB signal, the medal OUT signal, the replay signal, and the replay time state, which are special winning combination generation information that can specify the occurrence of the special winning combination. The medal OUT signal and the replay signal are input as replay time transition information that can specify the transition of

  In addition, in the ports 581 to 584 serving as information input means of this embodiment, in the case of the slot machine 1, only the medal OUT signal, which is grant information that can specify the number of game media to be awarded according to the winning, For the slot machines 1 ′ and 1 ″, both a medal OUT signal and a replay signal serving as replay winning information indicating that a replay winning has occurred are input.

  In addition, in the ports 581 to 584 serving as information input means of the present embodiment, a medal IN signal serving as bet amount information that can specify the bet amount and the number of medals (the number of game media) awarded in accordance with winnings are obtained. The medal OUT signal as the grant information that can be specified, and the BB1 signal as the special winning period specifying information that can specify the period in which the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus are generated as a special winning combination. In addition to the BB2 signal and the RB signal, a replay signal serving as replay winning information indicating that a replay winning has occurred is input.

  In addition, in ports 581 to 584 serving as information input means of this embodiment, as described later, as a chance zone period specifying information that can specify the period of the chance zone state, a medal OUT used for determining the start of the chance zone, as will be described later. Signal, a medal IN signal used for determining the end of the chance zone due to the exhaustion of the prescribed number of games, a medal OUT signal used for determining the end of the chance zone due to the winning of the falling role, and the end of the chance zone due to the end of the bonus The BB1 signal, BB2 signal, and RB signal used for determination are input.

  In addition, ports 581 to 584 serving as information input means of this embodiment include a BB1 signal, a BB2 signal, an RB signal, and replay time (replay time state) serving as special winning combination generation information that can specify the generation of a special winning combination. ) A medal IN signal serving as a chance zone end specifying information that can specify the end of the chance zone state due to completion of the prescribed number of games or establishment of a winning combination of a falling role, which is an end condition other than the transition to) The medal OUT signal and the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the replay signal, the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal, which are replay time period information that can specify the transition to the replay time (replay time state) and the end thereof, are input. Has been.

  In addition, in the ports 581 to 584 of this embodiment, it is specified which of the multiple types of special prizes accompanying the shift to the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus has occurred. BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, which are possible special winning information, and a plurality of types of specific general winning cherries, watermelons, and one specific winning combination of one piece can be specified A medal OUT signal serving as specific general winning information and a medal IN signal serving as game information that can identify that a game has been executed in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ are input.

  Also, in the ports 581 to 584 of this embodiment, the BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, and medal IN signal, which are game-related information generated in association with the game in the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. A medal OUT signal is input.

  Further, in the small role game counter provided in the RAM 575 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each of the general roles (general winnings) generated in the corresponding four slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. Of these, the special bonus big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonuses and each small role that is a common winning combination (simultaneous winning), specifically, cherry, watermelon, one piece The number of games since the occurrence of the small role winning is associated with each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ and stored for each machine number, and each slot machine 1, In 1 ′, 1 ″, it is possible to grasp the number of games since each small role winning is generated.

  Further, in the digest game number counter provided in the RAM 575 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, RT (replay time) or chance generated in the corresponding four slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. The zone state (only for the chance zone generation model) and the number of games after the occurrence of the game state are associated with each other and stored for each machine number of each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. With the number counter, the number of digested games after the RT (replay time) or chance zone state can be grasped by counting (counting) for each connected slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. ing.

  Further, in the most recent game table provided in the RAM 575 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the game execution time (medal IN signal) is associated with the number of games (game number) from the start of business. Input time), the number of bets, the number of payouts, the presence or absence of a replay winning, the base up to a predetermined number of games (number of games to be calculated) set on the RT-related setting screen (see FIG. 28) described later, The replay occurrence rate from the game up to a predetermined number of games (number of calculation target games) set on the RT-related setting screen (see FIG. 28) to be described later is determined for each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ The game content up to the last 20 games, the base value and the replay occurrence rate up to the number of games to be calculated that each game is the latest game are connected. Each slot machine 1, 1 'are, which is to be able to grasp every one ".

  Further, in the EEPROM 576 of this embodiment, the game information accumulated in the game information table stored in the calling lamp device 200 provided corresponding to the connected slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ and A game information table shown in FIG. 22 for storing the same game information (only today's data) for each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is stored.

  In the game information table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ connected is similar to the game information table stored in the call lamp device 200 described above. , The total number of games, the number of games between bonuses, the number of occurrences of BB (1), the number of cherry-BB (1) duplicate wins, and the watermelon-BB (1 ) Duplicate winning count, 1 sheet-BB (1) Duplicating winning count, BB (2) occurrence count, Cherry-BB (2) Duplicating winning count, Watermelon-BB (2) Duplicating winning count, 1 sheet -BB (2) Duplicate winning count, RB occurrence count, Cherry-RB overlapping winning count, Watermelon -RB overlapping winning count, 1 sheet -RB overlapping winning count, Cherry winning count, overlapping winning Cherry winning count And the number of watermelon prizes The number of duplicate winning watermelon wins, the number of single wins, the number of duplicate wins, the total number of medals, the total number of paid-out medals, the number of difference medals, and the total number of RT occurrences from the start of business The number of RTs, the total number of CZs that are the number of chance zone occurrences from the start of business, and the number of RTs that have shifted (occurred) into the chance zone (CZ) due to the end of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) RT number in BB-CZ, RT number in RB-CZ that is the number of RTs transferred (generated) in the chance zone (CZ) due to the end of the regular bonus, and 1-unit determination processing described later (see FIG. 39) 1 unit average TY that is the average value of medals earned in each 1 unit specified in 1), and 1 unit average RT number that is the average value of RTs generated within each 1 unit. These game information is stored in the same manner as later-described input-related processing, payout-related processing, RT determination processing, chance zone determination processing, and game state identification processing executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of the call lamp device 200. Each process is executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 for each port by inputting various signals to the ports 581 to 584, so that the latest information is sequentially updated.

  Further, in the EEPROM 576 of the present embodiment, the above-described gaming state history table (see FIG. 17) stored in the calling lamp device 200 provided corresponding to the connected slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. The gaming state history table shown in FIG. 23 for storing the same gaming state history information (today's data only) as the gaming state history managed in) for each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is stored. ing.

  In the gaming state history table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, each connected slot machine 1, 1 ′, as in the gaming state history table stored in the calling lamp device 200 described above. Corresponding to the 1 "machine number, the gaming state (normal; normal gaming state, BB1; big bonus 1, BB2; big bonus 2, RB; regular bonus, RT; replay time, chance; chance zone) and the number of occurrences ( n), the occurrence time of the gaming state, the number of one unit to which the gaming state belongs, the total number of games at the time of occurrence of the gaming state, the number of games during the gaming state, and the occurrence of the gaming state The total number of inserted medals at the time, the number of inserted medals during the gaming state, the total number of paid-out medals when the gaming state occurs, and the paid-out medal during the gaming state State-specific data (gaming state history) consisting of the number of slots and the number of difference medals during the period of the gaming state (the number of paid-out medals−the number of inserted medals) is the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. They are stored in the order in which they occurred.

  This gaming state history table is shown in FIG. 38 in the initialization process performed in response to the reception of the connection confirmation request transmitted from the hall computer 140 when the hall computer 140 is started up, as with the calling lamp device 200. The game state history table is initialized by performing the same process as the process for initializing the game state history table.

  Specifically, in the game state history table initialization processing in the collection unit 50 of the present embodiment, first, the machine number to be processed is specified, and all data in the game state history table corresponding to the machine number is reset ( Sy1 ′ not shown).

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of Sy2, and as described later, based on the RT related setting information of the machine number to be processed that is transmitted from the hall computer 140 and stored, it is connected to the port corresponding to the machine number. It is determined whether the slot machine is a full-output type slot machine 1 ″ that outputs a setting change signal.

  If it is determined in the determination that the slot machine 1 ″ is an all output type slot machine that outputs a setting change signal, the process proceeds to step Sy6, the gaming state at the start of business is estimated as the normal state, and the gaming state history table After registering “normal” as the gaming state of the first state-specific data (Sy7), it is determined whether or not the processing has been performed for the machine numbers of all ports. If not, Sy1 ′ Returning to FIG. 4, the same processing is performed for the next unit number, while the processing is terminated if all the unit numbers have been performed.

  In the case of these all-output type slot machines 1 ″, as in the case of the call lamp device 200, when a setting change operation is performed before the start of business and a setting change signal is output, an interrupt process described later is performed. Is executed in the collection unit 50, the output of the setting change signal is detected in the step SK5 in the interrupt processing, and when the corresponding slot machine 1 ″ is the setting change entry type, SK25 described later By performing this step, the gaming state of the first state-specific data is changed from “normal” to “chance” indicating the chance zone state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in Sy2 that it is not an all-output type slot machine 1 "to which a setting change signal is output, the process proceeds to Sy3, and in the RT related setting information corresponding to the unit number, the chance zone It is determined whether or not a setting change operation is checked as an occurrence condition.

  If the setting change operation is not checked, the process proceeds to the above-described Sy6 step, while if the setting change operation is checked, the process proceeds to the Sy4 step. It is presumed that a chance zone state has been reached due to the previous setting change operation, and the gaming state (current) in the gaming information table corresponding to the unit number is updated to “chance” and the total number of CZ occurrences 1 is added and updated, and “chance” is stored (registered) as the gaming state of the first state-specific data in the gaming state history table corresponding to the machine number.

  Furthermore, based on the RT related setting information, the setting content of “Termination Chance Zone Setting” is specified, and when “Termination Chance Zone Setting” is set to “Include”, the “Unit” item contains a unit number. “1” is stored to start one unit including the chance zone state, while if “not included” is set, nothing is stored.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the process has been performed for all the unit numbers. If not, the process returns to Sy1 ′ and the same process is performed for the next unit number, while all the units are If it has already been executed for the number, the processing is terminated, and the gaming state at the start of business is estimated for all the machine numbers in the gaming state history table, and is estimated as the gaming state of the first state-specific data. The played game state is registered.

  That is, by checking a setting change operation as a chance zone generation condition on an RT-related setting screen in the hall computer 140 to be described later, a general type slot machine 1 that does not output a setting change signal or a replay output type slot machine 1 ′. Even when the hall computer 140 is started up, it is estimated that the gaming state at the start of business is a chance zone state because the setting change operation is performed before the business start, and the estimated chance zone The state is registered as the gaming state of the first state-specific data in today's data in the gaming state history table.

  That is, the setting change operation is checked as a chance zone generation condition on the RT-related setting screen (operation entry model setting means) in the hall computer 140 described later, that is, it is set to be an operation entry type slot machine. Even when the general slot machine 1 or the replay output type slot machine 1 ′ to which the setting change signal is not output is received, the connection confirmation request is received from the hall computer 140 when the hall computer 140 is started. That is, it is determined that a chance zone state is established when a predetermined operation correspondence condition of receiving a connection confirmation request is satisfied, and the determined chance zone state is the first state-specific data in the current day data of the gaming state history table. Is registered as a gaming state of `` Termination Chance Zone Setting Is set to “include”, the chance zone state in which the start is determined is included in one unit (one unit period), and the control microcomputer executes the gaming state history table initialization process (MPU) 579 forms determination means and 1 unit period specifying means.

  As described above, the transmission data string 1 (see FIG. 18 (b)), which is table game information data including each game information tabulated in the game information table, the table number, and the unit ID of the collection unit 50, is provided. The game information for each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is sent to the hall computer 140 by today in response to an inquiry every predetermined time (for example, every 10 seconds) from the hall computer 140. It is managed in the game information table (FIG. 25).

  When the game state shifts to the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the regular bonus, the base game information data is not transferred to the hall computer 140 at the time of the transition without being based on an inquiry from the hall computer 140. Sent to.

  Similarly, the transmission data string 2 (FIG. 18 (b) as the game state history data including the state-specific data (gaming state history) determined in the gaming state history table, the unit number, and the unit ID of the collection unit 50. ))), But by changing the gaming state of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, new state-specific data of the gaming state is added to the gaming state history table. By being transmitted to the hall computer 140 based on the confirmation, in the hall computer 140, the gaming state history (data by state) for each slot machine 1, 1 ', 1 " It is managed in the gaming state history table (FIG. 26).

  Next, the hall computer 140 used in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, the hall computer 140 is connected to the data bus 141 for transmitting and receiving data inside the computer in response to the reception of the table game information data. RAM 142 used as a work memory and the like for updating the game information table to be described later, and performing display processing for displaying game information of each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, transmission processing for setting information, etc. Real-time clock (RTC) 144 for outputting time information and calendar information, storage device 145 composed of a magnetic disk or a magneto-optical disk, and determination of model selection acceptance and overlapping winning (simultaneous winning) on a duplicate winning-related setting screen described later Input device 1 such as a keyboard or mouse for inputting the number of games for the game 27, a display device 147 for displaying and outputting the duplicate winning-related setting screen shown in FIG. 27, a table-specific game information screen shown in FIG. 47, a printer 148 for printing out the table-specific game information screen, etc. It is a normal computer to which a communication unit 149 that performs data communication with the collection unit 50 via the relay unit 60 and data communication with each calling lamp device 200 is connected.

  The storage device 145 corresponds to the machine numbers of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, and 1 ″ as shown in FIG. 25 in addition to the processing programs for executing the various processes executed by the hall computer 140. In addition, the model name of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the unit ID of the collection unit 50 connected to the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ Corresponding to today's game information table in which various game information of today such as unit ID and total inserted medal number of the connected call lamp device 200 is updated, and the unit number of each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ The game information table of the previous day in which various game information of the previous day is stored and managed, and the game information of the previous day is stored and managed in association with the serial numbers of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. As shown in FIG. 26, each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is associated with each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ as shown in FIG. The game state history table that stores and manages the game state history generated on that day sequentially (today), and the game state history table for each day that stores and manages the game state history of the previous day and the day after the previous day (the previous day) Further, a table-specific gaming state history table (2 days before the last day), setting-specific winning probability data for each model of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, and the like are stored.

  In this game information table of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the model names of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ are associated with the machine numbers of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. , The unit ID of the collecting unit 50 connected to the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the unit ID of the calling lamp apparatus 200 connected to the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, and the total number of inserted medals , The total number of medals paid out, the number of difference medals, the total number of games, the number of games between bonuses, the number of occurrences of BB (1), the number of cherry-BB (1) duplicated winnings, and the watermelon-BB (1) duplicated winnings Number of times, 1 sheet-BB (1) Overlap winning number, BB (2) occurrence number, Cherry-BB (2) Overlap winning number, Watermelon-BB (2) Overlap winning number, 1 sheet-BB ( 2) Number of duplicate wins and number of RB occurrences Cherry-RB double wins, Watermelon-RB double wins, Single-RB double wins, Cherry wins, Double wins Cherry wins, Watermelon wins, Double wins watermelon wins, 1 (1)-(3) number of wins, duplicate winning 1 (1)-(3) number of wins, total replay time (RT), total chance zone (CZ), and BB-CZ RT number, RT number in RB-CZ, 1 unit average TY, 1 unit average RT number, and the game from the start of business until Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2) or Regular Bonus is generated for the first time And the number of games between bonuses, which is the number of games during which each big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) or regular bonus occurs, is stored and managed. In response to the reception of the table game information data shown in FIG. 18 (b) transmitted from each collection unit 50, each of these game information corresponds to each game corresponding to the table number included in the received table game information data. The information is updated to the data of each game information included in the table game information data (transmission data string 1), so that the latest game information of the day is centrally managed in the game information table today, and the game of the day The game information of each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ managed in the information table is displayed and output on the table-specific game information screen 1 of FIG.

  That is, in today's game information table of the present embodiment, for each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the total number of CZs, which is the number of chance zone occurrences, which is the number of times it is determined that a chance zone state has occurred, The total number of RTs, which is the number of times of transition to the replay time that is determined to have entered the replay time state, the number of times of BB1, BB2, the number of RBs, and the number of times of replay time transition that are the number of chance zone occurrences for each type of special winning combination The number of RTs in BB-CZ and the number of RTs in RB-CZ are tabulated, and the today's game information table constitutes a tabulating means.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the game state history table for each vehicle of the present day, the previous day, and the day before the present embodiment is associated with the game machine numbers of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. State and number of occurrences (n), occurrence time, number of one unit to which the gaming state belongs, the total number of games at the time of occurrence of the gaming state, the number of games during the gaming state, and the gaming state The total number of inserted medals at the time of occurrence, the number of inserted medals during the gaming state, the total number of paid-out medals at the time of occurrence of the gaming state, the number of paid-out medals during the gaming state, and the gaming state The number of difference medals during the period and the state-specific data (gaming state history) are stored and managed in the order in which they occurred in the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. The data for each state (game state history) In response to reception of the gaming state history data (transmission data string 2) shown in FIG. 18 (b) transmitted from the game 50, the latest state-specific data corresponding to the machine number included in the received gaming state history data By being additionally stored as (gaming state history), the gaming state history of the day is centrally managed in the stand-by gaming state history table, and each slot machine 1, 1 managed in the stand-by gaming state history table is recorded. 48. The state of occurrence of the game state based on the game state history of “1”, the state of occurrence of one unit, the distribution of the state of occurrence by the number of loops, and the like are displayed and output on the stand-by game information screen 2 of FIG. It has become.

  That is, in the table-specific gaming state history table of the present embodiment, one unit (one unit period) determined (specified) by a one unit determination process (to be described later) serving as a one unit period specifying unit executed by the collection unit 50. ), That is, the unit acquired medal number (unit TY) which is the sum of the difference medals which is the difference between the number of bets and the number of game media granted in the state-specific data in which the same unit number is determined by being determined as 1 unit ) Is counted.

  Further, in the table-specific gaming state history table of the present embodiment, one unit (1) that is identified as one unit by storing the same unit number in a one-unit determination process (to be described later) performed by the collection unit 50. State-specific data serving as occurrence status specifying information capable of specifying the occurrence status of chance zones, replay times (replay time status), and various bonuses (special winning combinations) that occurred during the unit period) are stored. The occurrence history specifying information storage means is formed by the state history table.

  Note that when the date is changed and the hall computer 140 is activated, the table-by-table game state history table data is carried over to the table-by-day game state history table for the previous day, Carry-over processing is performed so that the table-specific gaming state history table is carried over to the table-by-day gaming state history table.

  Further, in the hall computer 140 of the present embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation, the duplicated winning-related setting screen shown in FIG. 27 is displayed, and settings related to duplicated winning in each calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 are performed. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the duplicate winning-related setting screen of the present embodiment is configured to select and designate the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ to which the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set correspond. Whether to display the item “Setting base”, the item “Duplicate winning determination game number” for specifying the number of games for determining the number of small roles winning double winning (simultaneous winning), and the expected small role “Duplicate Winning Expectation Level Display Settings” item for selecting and specifying whether or not, and each of these double winning (simultaneous winning) small roles that are necessary to identify the occurrence of double winning (simultaneous winning) For specifying the type of payout and the number of payouts for the small role, and the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 of the setting target table required for estimating the set value. ”Includes the winning probability for each set value. Used to estimate the setting value in the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the setting target table and the item of “setting-specific winning probability data” for designating the data file of the winning probability data by setting (see FIG. 7). There is an item of “setting game information setting value estimation” for designating game information.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the item “Setting Target Unit” in the duplicated winning-related setting screen includes a check box and a selection window for each selection menu of “island unit” and “unit unit” that can be exclusively selected. When the calling lamp device 200 and the collecting unit 50 corresponding to all the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ installed on one island are set as the setting target tables, The check box corresponding to the “unit” selection menu is checked, and the island number where the setting target table is installed is selected in the corresponding selection window, while corresponding to one slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. When setting the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 as the setting target table, a check box corresponding to the selection menu of “unit” is set. With Check box, corresponding paging lamp like the setting target in the window system 200 and the collection unit 50 corresponds to the slot machine 1, 1 ', may be selected machine number 1 ".

  In addition, a single selection window is provided for the item of the number of duplicate winning determination games, and a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), or a regular bonus is generated after each small role winning is generated in the selection window. Sometimes, a predetermined number of games for determining that the generated big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) or regular bonus and the small combination have been won (simultaneous winning), that is, a small combination winning is generated. Selects a predetermined number of games, for example, 5 (games) for determining that a double bonus (simultaneous winning) occurs when a big bonus (1), big bonus (2), or regular bonus occurs within a predetermined number of games later You can specify.

  In the present embodiment, only one game is accepted as the number of these games common to each winning combination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is the kind of these playing combinations. A different predetermined number of games may be received for each cherry, watermelon, and combination.

  In addition, a check box corresponding to each display of “Yes” and “No” is provided in the item of the setting for the display of the expected double winning expectation, and when the small winning combination occurs, the duplicate winning expected expectation of the small winning combination is displayed. If you want to do so, check the check box corresponding to “Yes”, and even if the corresponding slot machine is a slot machine that does not have a duplicate winning function, or even if it is a slot machine that has a duplicate winning function, it is expected to win If the degree is not displayed, check the check box corresponding to “No”.

  In addition, the item for setting the number of overlapping winning small roles is provided with a selection window for designating the type of small role and the number of payouts corresponding to the display of small roles 1 to 4, and the corresponding slot machine 1 In each of 1 ′ and 1 ″, each small combination to be duplicated (simultaneously elected) and the number of payouts are designated.

  In addition, in the item of the winning probability data by setting, a window for designating a path to the data file of the winning probability data by setting and a selection input unit of “reference” are provided, and “reference” is selected and input. By selecting the corresponding data file on the file reference screen in which the directory structure displayed as an icon is displayed, the path data of the selected data file is automatically input into the window.

  In addition, the setting value estimation game information setting item is provided with a selection window corresponding to the display of the game information 1 to the game information 6, and each of these selection windows has game information used for setting value estimation, That is, even if the set value is different and the winning probability is different, the game information that can be used for estimating the set value, for example, the winning probability data by setting of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ shown in FIG. For example, a BB1 probability, a BB2 probability, an RB probability, a cherry probability, and a one-piece winning probability that have different set values and different winning probabilities may be selected.

  Then, after specifying the setting contents in each item on the duplicate win related setting screen, by selecting and inputting a selection input section of “setting” provided below the duplicate win related setting screen, the duplicate win related The setting information including the contents selected on the setting screen and the data file of the winning probability data by setting is the unit number specified in the item of “Setting target vehicle” (in the case of an island, all the vehicle numbers installed on the island) Corresponding to the call lamp device 200 of the call lamp ID stored in the game information table today, that is, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the machine number designated in the “set object” item. And the collecting unit stored in the game information table today corresponding to the machine number specified in the item of “setting object” The data is sent to the collection unit 50 of D, that is, the collection unit 50 connected to the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the machine number designated in the “setting object” item, and the setting information is called. The data is stored in the EEPROM 276 of the lamp device 200 and the EEPROM 576 of the collection unit 50, and is used in each process described later performed in the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50. The collection unit 50 is connected. Since there are a plurality of four slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, setting information is stored in association with the respective machine numbers of the connected slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″.

  That is, in the EEPROM 276 of this embodiment, each setting value that can be selected in the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ by the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. (1-6) and the theoretical value of the evaluation information corresponding to the set value (1-6), the winning probability of the big bonus (1), the winning probability of the big bonus (2), the winning probability of the regular bonus Further, setting information having setting-specific winning probability data for storing the cherry winning probability and the single winning combination probability is stored, and the EEPROM 276 forms setting specifying information storage means.

  In addition, in the hall computer 140 of the present embodiment, an RT-related setting screen shown in FIG. 28 is displayed by performing a predetermined operation, and settings relating to the replay time (RT) in each call lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 are displayed. Can be done.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the RT-related setting screen of this embodiment is a “setting” for selecting and specifying the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ”corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set. `` Target base '' item, `` Output signal type '' item, `` Chance zone '' item to set whether or not chance zone has occurred, chance zone occurrence condition and termination condition, and whether or not to re-enter, and replay “Replay time” item for setting time (RT) transition (start) conditions and end conditions, and “RT transition determination” item for setting a determination method for determining transition to replay time (RT) And an item “RT end determination” for setting a determination method for determining the end to the replay time (RT).

  The item of “Setting target stand” on this RT related setting screen is the same as the duplicate winning related setting screen, and a check box and a selection are selected for each selection menu of “island unit” and “unit unit” which can be exclusively selected. A window is provided, and by selecting “island unit” and inputting an island number, the calling lamp device 200 to be set and the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ”to which the collection unit 50 corresponds are displayed as“ It is possible to designate for each “island unit”, and by specifying the machine number of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the calling lamp device 200 corresponding to one slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is designated. In addition, the collection unit 50 can be designated as a setting target.

  In addition, one selection window is provided in the item of output signal type, and in this selection window, the slot machine corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set is displayed as a replay signal and a setting change signal. Is a general-type slot machine 1 that outputs no replay, or a replay output type slot machine 1 ′ that outputs a replay signal but does not output a setting change signal, or an all-output type that outputs a replay signal and a setting change signal. It can be set by selecting whether it is a slot machine 1 ″.

  In the “chance zone” item, as shown in FIG. 28, check boxes are provided corresponding to the “present” and “none” items, and the calling lamp device 200 to be set and It is possible to set whether or not the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ corresponding to the collection unit 50 generates a chance zone state, and when “Yes” is set, it depends on “Yes”. The contents of the three sub-items “occurrence condition”, “end condition”, and “re-entry” are activated, and the contents of these sub-items can be set.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the sub-item “occurrence condition” includes a plurality of conditions (selection items) for starting a chance zone state and a chance zone state started for the condition (selection item). The maximum number of games (specified number of games) can be set.

  Specifically, in the sub-item of “occurrence condition”, it corresponds to the selection items of “BB1”, “BB2”, “RB”, “setting change operation”, “small role”, and “the number of games between jackpots” Check boxes are provided, and all the selection items corresponding to the start conditions of the chance zone state occurring in the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ corresponding to the setting target calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 are checked. And set.

  For example, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ to which the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set correspond is the end of the big bonus (1), the end of the big bonus (2), the end of the regular bonus, the setting If the model (type) starts the chance zone state when the change operation is performed and the number of games between bonuses is 600, the selection item corresponding to the start condition of the chance zone state, as shown in FIG. Check (select) check boxes corresponding to “BB1”, “BB2”, “RB”, “setting change operation”, “number of jackpot games”, and a chance that the selected item is started under the corresponding start condition When the maximum number of games (specified number of games) exists in the zone state, the maximum number of games is displayed in the corresponding game number selection window. Specified number game) may be set.

  That is, the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ”that check (select) the check boxes corresponding to“ BB1 ”,“ BB2 ”, and“ RB ”are Big Bonus (1), Big In this slot machine, a bonus (2) and a regular bonus can be generated, and the number of games (time period) varies depending on the type of special winning combination that has occurred.

  In the RT-related setting screen of the hall computer 140 according to the present embodiment, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set are set change operations (predetermined operations). It is possible to set whether or not the slot machine is an intrusion type slot machine that shifts to the chance zone state by executing the check box by checking the check box corresponding to the “setting change operation”, and the RT of the hall computer 140 The operation entry model setting means is formed by the related setting screen.

  In addition, since there are models (types) in which a specific small role winning is a condition (start) for shifting to the chance zone state, the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ', 1 " In the case of a model (type) that shifts to the chance zone state by winning, the check box corresponding to the selection item of “small role” is checked, and the type of the specific small role winning and the number of medals awarded When the maximum number of games (specified number of games) exists in the chance zone state started by the specific small role winning, the maximum number of games (specified number of games) is set in the corresponding game number selection window. good.

  In this embodiment, since the chance zone state given by the setting change operation is usually the same as the chance zone state started at the end of the big bonus, the selection item of “setting change operation” Is not provided with a game number selection window, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game number selection window is also provided for the selection item of these “setting change operations” so that they can be set individually. It goes without saying that it is good.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 28, check boxes corresponding to the selection items of “game number consumption” and “falling small role” are provided in the sub-item of “end condition”. All the selection items corresponding to the end conditions of the chance zone state in the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ to which the device 200 and the collection unit 50 correspond are checked and set. Since the winning combination is completed, it is not necessary to select the selection item for winning the winning combination.

  For example, if the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ to which the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set correspond does not win the winning combination, the number of games after shifting to the chance zone reaches the specified number of games, If it is a model (type) that ends when the falling role wins before reaching the specified number of games, check boxes corresponding to the selection items of both “Number of games” and “Small falling role” In addition to checking, in the window corresponding to “falling small part”, the type of falling small part and the number of medals awarded by winning the falling small part may be set.

  That is, on the RT-related setting screen of the hall computer 140 of this embodiment, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ to which the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set correspond corresponds to a predetermined number of games (specified game). Number), whether it is a slot machine that ends the chance zone state or a slot machine that ends the chance zone state by winning a predetermined falling role. The check box corresponding to the selected item can be selected, and a chance zone end condition setting means is formed by the hall computer 140 having the RT related setting screen.

  In the present embodiment, since the end condition is the same for the chance zone state regardless of the type of the start condition in which the chance zone state is started, only the common end condition is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the end condition varies depending on the start condition type of the chance zone state, the end condition can be set for each start condition type. good.

  The sub-item “re-entry” is provided with a check box corresponding to the sub-item “re-entry”, and the slot machines 1, 1 corresponding to the setting target calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 are provided. If '1' is a re-entry type, that is, a model (type) in which the fourth digit of the RT type code is “A”, the check box may be checked, and the re-entry, that is, RT (replay) When the maximum number of games (specified number of games) exists in the chance zone state started at the end of (time), the maximum number of games (specified number of games) may be set in the corresponding game number selection window.

  In other words, on the RT-related setting screen of the hall computer 140 of the present embodiment, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ to which the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set correspond corresponds after the end of the replay time state. It is possible to set whether or not it is a re-entry type slot machine that re-enters the zone state, and a re-entry model setting means is formed by the hall computer 140 having the RT related setting screen.

  Further, in the item “Replay Time (RT)”, as shown in FIG. 28, two sub-items of transition condition and end condition are provided.

  In the transition condition sub-item, as shown in FIG. 28, a plurality of conditions (selection items) at which the replay time (RT) is started and the maximum replay time (RT) started at the condition (selection item). The number of games (specified number of games) can be set.

  Specifically, a check box corresponding to each selection item of “BB1”, “BB2”, “RB”, and “CZ small and medium role” is provided in the sub-item of “Migration condition”. All the selection items corresponding to the transition condition of the replay time (RT) occurring in the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ corresponding to the target calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 are checked and set.

  That is, the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ does not generate the chance zone state, and the replay time (RT) of the prescribed number of games is reached by the end of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus. If the model (type) is shifted to, check boxes corresponding to “BB1”, “BB2”, and “RB” may be ticked, and the corresponding prescribed game number may be set in the corresponding game number selection window.

  Also, if the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is a model (type) that generates a chance zone state and the replay time (RT) transition condition is a predetermined small role winning, The check box corresponding to “CZ small and medium role” is ticked, and the corresponding prescribed number of games may be set in the corresponding selection window.

  Specifically, for example, in the case where the rush combination is “Bell”, the payout number is 10 and the prescribed game number is 50 games, as shown in FIG. 28, the prescribed game number is “50”. G may be set.

  In the end condition sub-item, as shown in FIG. 28, a plurality of conditions (selection items) for ending the replay time (RT) can be set.

  Specifically, in the sub-item of “End condition”, check boxes are provided corresponding to the selection items of “transfer winning prize”, “digestion of games”, and “falling small role”. All the selection items corresponding to the end condition of the replay time (RT) occurring in the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ corresponding to the target calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 are checked and set.

  That is, if the first digit symbol of the RT model code is “a”, that is, the model (type) for which the replay time (RT) ends due to the transitional prize winning (bonus occurrence), Only the check box corresponding to "" is checked, and the symbol of the first digit of the RT model code is "b", that is, the replay time (RT) ends when the number of games after the transition to RT reaches the specified number of games. If it is a model to be used, it is only necessary to check the check box corresponding to “Number of games”. The first digit of the RT model code is “c”, that is, the bonus is not won. The model (type) whose replay time (RT) ends when the number of games after the transition reaches the specified number of games or the bonus is won before reaching the specified number of games In this case, the check boxes corresponding to “transfer prize winning” and “game number exhaustion” may be checked, and the symbol of the first digit of the RT model code is “d”, that is, the bonus is won after the RT transition. Or, if it is a model (type) whose replay time (RT) ends due to the winning of the fallen winning combination, it is sufficient to check the check boxes corresponding to the “moving winning award” and “falling small winning combination”. The symbol of the first digit of the model code is “e”, that is, the falling role won a prize before reaching the specified number of games after the RT transition without reaching the specified number of games. If the model (type) for which the replay time (RT) ends due to, check the check boxes corresponding to “Number of games” and “Small fall”, and one digit of the RT model code The symbol of “f”, that is, if the bonus is not won and the number of games after the transition to RT reaches the specified number of games without winning the falling role, or is the bonus won before reaching the specified number of games? If the model (type) for which the replay time (RT) ends due to the winning of the falling role, check all the check boxes for "Movement role winning", "Number of games", and "Trashing small role" Just do it.

  When the check box corresponding to “falling small part” is checked, in the window corresponding to “falling small part”, the type of falling small part, for example, “cherry” and the winning of the falling small part are paid out. The number of medals, for example “2” is set.

  In addition, in the item “RT transition determination”, as shown in FIG. 28, check boxes are provided corresponding to a plurality of determination methods used for determination of transition (start) to the replay time (RT). By checking the check box, it is possible to specify a determination method to be used for transition (start) determination.

  Specifically, as a determination method, in the model (type) to which the chance zone state is not given, the transition is made to the replay time (RT) by the end of the bonus generated by winning the transitional combination, so that the bonus signal (BB1 signal, BB2 signal) , RB signal), the bonus signal determination selection item for determining the start of RT, and when the replay time (RT) is reached, the replay role is higher than in the normal gaming state or chance zone state. Since the winning medal rate (base) is improved by winning at a frequency, the selection item of the base determination that determines that the base has exceeded the threshold and the transition to the replay time (RT) is made, and the replay time (RT) In the case of becoming a replay, the replay role wins more frequently than in the normal gaming state or chance zone state. Due to the selection item of the replay occurrence rate determination that determines the transition to the replay time (RT) when the raw rate exceeds the threshold, and the medal payout corresponding to the rush combination (small role) in the chance zone state A selection item for determining whether or not to enter the replay time (RT) is provided together with a corresponding check box. By checking the check box, the replay time is determined according to the method for determining the checked selection item. Transition determination to (RT) is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, the selection items for the base determination include the number of the most recent games for calculating the base (the number of games to be calculated), a threshold value used as a criterion for determination, and a replay time when the threshold value is exceeded. A selection window is provided for setting a transition game for designating which game within the number of calculation target games to be the game transferred to (RT). In these selection windows, the number of calculation target games and a threshold value are set. The game hall can set the transition game independently.

  Similarly, the selection item for determining the replay occurrence rate is the number of games of the most recent game for calculating the replay occurrence rate (the number of games to be calculated), the threshold value used as a criterion for determination, and the replay time when the threshold value is exceeded ( (RT) is provided with a selection window for setting a transition game for designating which game within the number of games to be calculated among the games to be calculated. In these selection windows, the number of games to be calculated, a threshold value, The game hall can set the transition game independently.

  As for the number of games to be calculated for the base and the replay occurrence rate, in this embodiment, the minimum value is 5 games and the maximum value is a range of 20 games that can be temporarily stored in the latest game table. The transition game can be specified within the range of the set number of calculation target games.

  In addition, the base threshold value is a numerical value between the base in the normal gaming state or the chance zone state and the base in the replay time (usually 100 or more), and is a numerical value that is hardly reached in the normal gaming state or the chance zone state. For example, 70 may be set, and the threshold value of the replay occurrence rate may be a replay occurrence rate (1 / 7.33) in a normal gaming state or a chance zone state, and a replay occurrence rate (1 / 1.17) in a replay time. ) In the normal gaming state or chance zone state, for example, (5/10; 5 times in 10 games) may be set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, the rush combination payout determination is provided with a selection window for setting the type of rush combination and the number of medals to be paid out by winning the rush combination. What is necessary is just to set the classification of the combination and the number of medals to be paid out by the winning.

  The selection of these determination methods is, for example, a model that does not output a replay signal and that has a combination of a small combination or a small combination of three payout numbers for which the same three-pulse medal OUT signal is output as a replay winning. If there is a possibility that an error may occur in the replay occurrence rate due to the occurrence of the replay occurrence due to the winning of the three small payouts being counted as a replay occurrence, the model ( Type).

  In addition, as described above, even if the model has a payout number of 3 in addition to the replay winning, if the winning probability of the small winning is significantly lower than the replay winning probability, the replay occurrence rate determination is performed. In some cases, even if the selection is made, it is possible to determine whether to shift to the replay time (RT) without any problem.

  In addition, the check boxes corresponding to these selection items may check a plurality of check boxes at the same time. For example, if both the base determination and the replay occurrence rate determination are checked, the replay time is determined by both determination methods. (RT) is determined to be a transition to replay time (RT), and by checking a plurality of determination methods at the same time, the weaknesses of each determination method can be complemented. It is like that.

  Specifically, for example, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 pays out the same payout number as the entry to the replay time (RT). If there is a model with a combination of the above, specifically, a model that can receive multiple types of replay winnings, and only one type of replay winning in the replay winnings is a rush, etc. In addition to the payout determination, checking either one or both of the base determination and the replay occurrence rate determination generates a small combination or combination of small combinations that pays out the same payout amount as the rush combination during the chance zone state. As a result, it is possible to avoid erroneously determining the transition to the replay time (RT), and more accurately determining the transition to the replay time (RT). It becomes possible way.

  That is, for the item “RT transition determination” in the present embodiment, each determination method in the item can be selected redundantly, and among these determination methods, “bonus signal determination” By determining that the replay time (RT) has shifted in the determination method, it is an independent determination item that determines that the replay time (RT) has shifted without depending on the determination results of the other determination methods. Regarding the “payout determination”, “base determination”, and “replay occurrence rate determination”, the transition of the replay time (RT) is determined by determining that all the selected (checked) determination methods are the transition of the replay time (RT). It is set as a linkage determination item that is determined as

  Further, in the item “RT end determination”, as shown in FIG. 28, check boxes are provided corresponding to a plurality of determination methods used for determining the end (start) of the replay time (RT). By checking the check box, the determination method used for the end determination can be designated.

  Specifically, as a determination method, a bonus signal determination selection item for determining the end of RT by input of a bonus signal (BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal) associated with the winning combination of the transitional role, and the number of digested games are defined games. The selection item for determining the number of games to determine the end of RT by reaching the number, and when the replay time (RT) ends and the normal game state or the chance zone state is reached, it is compared with the replay time (RT). Since the medal rate (base) decreases, the base determination selection item that determines the end of the replay time (RT) when the base is lower than the threshold, and the replay time (RT) ends normally. In the gaming state or chance zone state, the frequency of replay winning is reduced, so the replay occurrence rate is lower than the threshold value. The replay occurrence rate selection selection item for determining the end of the replay time (RT), and the replay time (RT) due to the medal payout corresponding to the falling role (small role) during the replay time (RT). ) Is determined together with a corresponding check box, and by checking the check box, the replay time (RT) is selected according to the checked selection item determination method. An end determination is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, the selection items for the base determination include the number of the most recent games for which the base is calculated (the number of calculation target games), a threshold value used as a criterion for determination, and replay when the threshold value is lower than the threshold value. A selection window is provided for setting a transition game for designating which game within the number of games to be calculated as a game whose time (RT) has ended. In these selection windows, the number of games to be calculated, The game hall can set the threshold value and the transition game independently.

  Similarly, the selection item for determining the replay occurrence rate is the replay time when the number of games of the most recent game for calculating the replay occurrence rate (the number of games to be calculated), a threshold value for determination, and a threshold value lower than the threshold value. A selection window is provided for setting a transition game for designating which game within the number of calculation target games to be a game for which (RT) has been completed. In these selection windows, the number of calculation target games and a threshold value are set. The game hall can set the transition game independently.

  In this embodiment, a selection window for the number of games to be calculated for base determination and replay occurrence rate determination is provided for each of “RT transition determination” and “RT end determination”. It is impossible to set different calculation target game numbers for each of “RT end determination” and “RT transition determination” or “RT end determination”. The set calculation target game number is automatically input as the other calculation target game number, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these “RT transition determination” and “RT end” It is possible to set a different number of calculation target games for each of “determination”, and use different bases and replay occurrence rates for these “RT transition determination” and “RT end determination”. There.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, a selection window for setting the number of medals to be paid out by the winning of the falling combination is provided for the falling combination payout determination, and the selection window pays out by the winning of the falling combination. What is necessary is just to set the number of medals.

  As a selection of these determination methods, if “transfer role winning” is checked as the replay time (RT) end condition, the bonus signal determination is checked, and “replay time (RT) end condition” is “game number digest”. If it is checked, the game number determination may be checked. If the “falling small role” is checked, the falling role payout determination may be checked.

  However, when the fallen combination payout determination is checked, as described above in the RT transition determination, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is issued a small combination or the small combination in which the same payout number as the replay time (RT) fallen combination is paid out. If the model (type) has a combination of small roles, the replay time will be incorrect due to the occurrence of a small role or combination of small roles in which the same payout amount as the fallen role has been issued during the replay time (RT). (RT) may be determined to be terminated, and the termination determination may not be performed accurately. Thus, there is a model in which there is a small combination or combination of small combinations in which the same number of coins to be paid out as a fallen combination is present ( For Type), along with these fallen role payout determinations, at least one of base determination or replay occurrence rate determination is selected in duplicate. By determining that all of the determination methods selected (checked) from the end of the replay time (RT) are determined as the end of the replay time (RT), the replay time (RT) is more accurately determined. It is preferable to set so that the end of can be determined.

  That is, for the item “RT end determination” of this embodiment, each determination method in the item can be selected redundantly, and among these determination methods, “bonus signal determination” and “number of games” The “determination” is an independent determination item that is determined to be the end of the replay time (RT) without depending on the determination result of the other determination methods by determining that the replay time (RT) is ended in each determination method. On the other hand, in the “falling role payout determination”, “base determination”, and “replay occurrence rate determination”, all of the determination methods selected (checked) are the end of the replay time (RT), as in the RT transition determination. The determination is made as a cooperation determination item that is determined to be the end of the replay time (RT).

  Note that the selection of the determination method is not limited to the above-described example. For example, the model (type) in which a replay signal is output, such as slot machines 1 ′ and 1 ″, can be determined from the replay occurrence rate. If it is possible to reliably determine the end of the replay time (RT), select “replay occurrence rate determination” without checking “bonus signal determination” even if “transfer bonus winning” is checked ( In the same way, even if “Troll Falling Small” is checked, “Replay Occurrence Rate Determination” is selected (checked) without checking “Troll Falling Out”. You may do it.

  That is, on the RT-related setting screen of the hall computer 140 of the present embodiment, the start and end of the replay time in the replay time determination process described later, which is performed by the control microcomputers (MPU) 279 and 579 serving as one unit period specifying means. Whether the information used for specifying the period of the replay time is “game number determination” based on the medal IN signal that is game execution information, or “falling role payout determination” based on the medal OUT signal that is grant information, It is possible to set whether to determine the replay occurrence rate based on the replay signal which is the replay winning information, and the replay time period specifying information type setting means is formed by the hall computer 140 having the RT related setting screen.

  Here, specific settings of RT-related settings for each representative model (type) will be described. As the models to be described, in the above-mentioned RT model code (see FIG. 8), NNN0a (model that does not generate a chance zone), ANA1c (chance zone generation, no re-entry, set value change rush), AAA3e (chance) The following describes three types of models: zone generation, re-entry, and set value change rush.

  First, for the model of the RT model code NNN0a, “None” is checked in the “Chance Zone” item, and in the “Replay Time (RT)” item, the RT start condition, for example, “BB1”, Check “BB2” and “RB” to set each specified number of games, and since the first digit of the RT model code is “a”, check the item “Movement Award” as the RT end condition. It ’s fine.

  Then, “bonus signal determination” may be checked in the “RT transition determination” item, and “bonus signal determination” may be checked in the “RT end determination” item.

  Next, in the case of the model of the RT model code ANA1c, “Yes” is checked in the “Chance Zone” item, and the generation condition and end condition activated by the check are set. Since the fourth digit of the RT model code is “N”, the “re-entry” check box is not checked.

  As a condition for occurrence, for example, a model (type) in which a chance zone state of 20 games is given by the end of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) and a chance zone state of 10 games is given by the end of the regular bonus. Then, as illustrated in FIG. 28, the check boxes of the selection items “BB1”, “BB2”, and “RB” may be checked to set the prescribed number of games in the corresponding selection window. .

  Furthermore, since the third digit of the RT model code is “A”, the check box corresponding to the selection item of “setting change operation” is checked.

  As an end condition, for example, in the case of a model (type) in which the chance zone state ends due to the consumption of the prescribed number of games or the winning of a falling small role, the selection item of “game number consumption” and the selection item of “falling small role” Check the check box corresponding to, and set the type and number of payouts in the selection window corresponding to the selection item of “falling smalls”. It is determined that the chance zone state is ended when the number of games in the chance zone state reaches the specified number of games, or when a payout amount corresponding to the falling small combination occurs in the chance zone state.

  In addition, since the item of “replay time (RT)” is a model that generates a chance zone state, in the sub-item of the transition condition, the check box of “CZ small and medium role” is checked, and the type of rushing role (for example, Bell), the number of payouts (for example, 10), and the prescribed number of games in the chance zone state (for example, 50) to be transferred may be set in the corresponding selection window.

  On the other hand, in the sub-item of the end condition, since the first digit of the RT model code is “c”, the selection items “transfer prize winning” and “digest number of games” may be checked.

  In the “RT transition determination” item, the “rush entry payout determination” is checked, and the number of the rush combination payouts in the corresponding selection window, for example, the rush combination is “Bell” and the number of payouts is 10 sheets. If so, “10” is set.

  At this time, as described above, in the case where there are other small roles or combinations of small roles in which the same number of medals as the rushing role are paid out, the rushing role is not actually won, Since it may be erroneously determined that the entry player has won a prize and has shifted to the replay time (RT), it is considered that the determination to shift to the replay time (RT) may be inaccurate. In this case, in addition to the “rush combination payout determination”, “base determination” and / or “replay occurrence rate determination” is checked, or “base determination” and / or “ Check “Replay occurrence rate determination”.

  In the “RT end determination” item, the replay time (RT) end condition is “transfer role winning” and “game number exhaustion” as described above. What is necessary is just to check “bonus signal determination” and “game number determination” which are determination methods corresponding to “number digest”.

  Next, in the case of the model of the RT model code AAA3e, “Yes” is checked in the “Chance zone” item, and the generation condition and end condition activated by the check are set. Since the fourth digit of the RT model code is “A”, if the check box for “re-entry” is checked and there is a predetermined number of games in the chance zone state started by re-entry, for example, the predetermined game If the number is 10 games, “10” that is the specified number of games may be set in the corresponding selection window.

  As the generation conditions, for example, a model in which a chance zone state of 3 games is given by winning a special small role “Bell”, and a chance zone state of 999 games is given in which the number of jackpot games is 600 games. If (type), check the check box corresponding to the selection item of “small role”, set the type of small role, the number of payouts and the prescribed number of games in the selection window, The check box corresponding to the selected item may be checked, and the numerical value of the number of big hit games and the prescribed number of games may be set in the corresponding selection window.

  Furthermore, since the third digit of the RT model code is “A”, the check box corresponding to the selection item of “setting change operation” is checked.

  As an end condition, for example, in the case of a model (type) in which the chance zone state ends when the prescribed number of games is exhausted, the check box corresponding to the selection item “Disappear game number” may be checked.

  In addition, since the item of “replay time (RT)” is a model that generates a chance zone state, in the sub-item of the transition condition, the check box of “CZ small and medium role” is checked, and the type of rushing role (for example, Bell), the number of payouts (for example, 10), and the prescribed number of games in the chance zone state (for example, 30) to be transferred may be set in the corresponding selection window.

  On the other hand, in the sub-item of the end condition, since the first digit of the RT model code is “e”, the selection items of “transfer winning prize”, “digestion of games” and “falling small role” are checked and fallen. The type of small combination (for example, cherry) and the number of payouts (two) may be set in the selection window corresponding to the selection item of “falling small combination”.

  Since the setting in the item “RT transition determination” is the same as that in the model of the RT model code ANA1c described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the “RT end determination” item, since the replay time (RT) end conditions are “transfer winning prize”, “game number exhaustion”, and “falling small role” as described above, these “transfer” It is only necessary to check “bonus signal determination”, “game number determination”, and “falling role payout determination”, which are determination methods corresponding to “winning prize” and “game number exhaustion”.

  At this time, if there are other small roles or combinations of small roles where the same number of medals are paid out as the falling role, the falling role is actually won even though the falling role has not won. Therefore, if the replay time (RT) end determination may be inaccurate, it may be erroneously determined that the replay time (RT) has ended. Check “base determination” and / or “replay occurrence rate determination” in addition to “combination payout determination”, or “base determination” and / or “replay occurrence rate determination” instead of “falling role payout determination” Check it.

  Then, after specifying the setting contents in each item on these RT-related setting screens, by selecting and inputting a “setting” selection input section provided below the RT-related setting screen, the RT-related setting screen is displayed. RT-related setting information including data that can specify the selected content is the game number that corresponds to the machine number specified in the item of “Setting object” (all cars installed on the island in the case of islands) The call lamp apparatus 200 having the call lamp ID stored in the information table, that is, the call installed corresponding to the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the machine number designated in the “setting target machine” item. The lamp unit 200 and the collection unit 50 of the collection unit ID stored in the game information table today corresponding to the machine number specified in the item of “target vehicle”, In other words, it is transmitted to the collection unit 50 connected to the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the machine number designated in the item “target table”, the EEPROM 276 of the calling lamp device 200, and the collection unit The RT-related setting information storage processing is executed by the control microcomputers (MPUs) 279 and 579 in the 50 EEPROMs 576, so that the transmitted RT-related setting information is stored in the EEPROMs 276 and 576, and the calling lamp device 200 and the collecting lamp information are collected. It is used in each process described later performed in the unit 50. In the collection unit 50, since the connected slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ are a plurality of four, the connected slots Setting information is stored in association with each machine number of the machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″.

  That is, in the RT-related setting information storage processing performed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279, the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 to be set are set change operations (predetermined operations). Stores RT-related setting information including whether or not the check box corresponding to the “setting change operation” on the RT-related setting screen is checked as to whether or not it is an operation rush type slot machine that shifts to a chance zone state by execution The control intrusion model setting means is formed by a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that performs the RT-related setting information storage processing.

  Further, in the RT related setting information storing process executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279, the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 to be set have a predetermined number of games (specified number of games). ), Whether it is a slot machine that ends the chance zone state due to the completion of the chance zone state or a slot machine that ends the chance zone state due to winning a predetermined falling role. Setting is possible by storing RT-related setting information including whether or not a check box corresponding to a selection item of “small role” is checked, and is controlled by a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that performs the RT-related setting information storage processing. Chance zone end condition setting means is formed.

  Further, in the RT related setting information storing process executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ corresponding to the calling lamp device 200 to be set is set to the chance zone after the end of the replay time state. Whether or not it is a re-entry type slot machine that transitions to a state again, by storing RT-related setting information including whether or not the check box corresponding to the “re-entry” sub-item on the RT-related setting screen is checked A re-entry model setting means is formed by a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that performs the RT-related setting information storage processing.

  In addition, in the RT related setting information storage process performed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279, in the replay time determination process described later, which is performed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 serving as a unit period specifying means, Whether the information used for specifying the period of the replay time at the end is “game number determination” based on the medal IN signal that is game execution information, or “falling role payout determination” based on the medal OUT signal that is grant information Whether or not to determine the replay occurrence rate based on the replay signal serving as the replay winning information can be set by storing RT-related setting information including whether or not a check box corresponding to each selection item is checked. The replay time period is specified by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that performs the related setting information storage process. Information type setting means is formed.

  Further, in the hall computer 140 of the present embodiment, by performing a predetermined operation, the one unit related setting screen shown in FIG. 29 is displayed, and the setting relating to one unit in each calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 is performed. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the RT-related setting screen of this embodiment is a “setting” for selecting and designating the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ”to which the calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 to be set correspond. “Target stand” item, “Unit continuation setting” item for setting execution / non-execution of unit continuation when bonus occurs in chance zone state, and chance zone state that is the end of one unit, An item “end chance zone setting” for setting whether or not to include in one unit is provided.

  The “Setting Target Unit” item on this one unit related setting screen is the same as the duplicate winning related setting screen and RT related setting screen, and each selection menu of “island unit” and “unit unit” which can be exclusively selected. A check box and a selection window are provided for each, and by selecting “island unit” and inputting an island number, the calling machine 200 and the collection unit 50 to which the setting is made correspond to the slot machines 1, 1. “1” can be designated for each “island unit”, and by specifying the machine number of slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, one slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ can be designated. The corresponding calling lamp device 200 and the collection unit 50 can be designated as setting targets.

  In addition, the “Unit continuation setting” item has check boxes corresponding to “Yes” and “No” items. By selecting (checking) the check box corresponding to “Yes”, When a bonus occurs during the chance zone, you can set to continue one unit, but when a bonus occurs during the chance zone by selecting (checking) the check box corresponding to “No” However, one unit is not continued, one unit ends when the bonus is generated, and the start point of the generated bonus can be set as the start of a new unit.

  In addition, check boxes corresponding to “include” and “not include” are also provided in the “end chance zone setting” item, and the check box corresponding to “include” is selected (checked). Thus, the end chance zone that does not shift to the replay time (RT), specifically, the chance zone that has shifted to the normal gaming state can be set to be included in one unit, while the check box corresponding to “Do not include” is selected ( By checking), it is possible to set so that a terminal chance zone that does not shift to the replay time (RT) is not included in one unit.

  In the present embodiment, the “no” item is selected (checked) in the “unit continuation setting”, and the “not included” item is selected (checked) in the “end chance zone setting” item. Since the chance zone state that ends when a bonus is generated also falls under the “end chance zone that does not shift to the replay time (RT)”, it is not included in one unit. It is not limited to this, and the chance zone state that ends when these bonuses are generated may be uniquely included in one unit regardless of the setting, or these bonuses may be generated It may be possible to set whether or not to include the chance zone state at the end in one unit on the one unit related setting screen.

  Then, after specifying the setting contents in each item on the 1 unit related setting screen, by selecting and inputting a “setting” selection input section provided below the 1 unit related setting screen, the 1 unit related setting screen is selected. One unit related setting information including data that can specify the content selected on the setting screen corresponds to the unit number specified in the item of “Setting Target Unit” (in the case of island, all unit numbers installed on the island) The call lamp device 200 having the call lamp ID stored in the game information table today, that is, installed corresponding to the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the machine number designated in the “set object” item And the collection unit ID of the collection unit ID stored in the game information table today corresponding to the machine number designated in the item “Setting Target” 0, that is, transmitted to the collection unit 50 connected to the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the machine number designated in the “setting target machine” item, and these RT related setting information is called the calling lamp device. The data is stored in the EEPROM 276 of the 200 and the EEPROM 576 of the collecting unit 50, and is used in each process described later performed in the calling lamp device 200 and the collecting unit 50. In the collecting unit 50, the connected slots Since the machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ are a plurality of four, setting information is stored in association with the respective machine numbers of the connected slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″.

  Hereinafter, from the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ according to the first embodiment, the ringing lamp device 200 according to the outputs of the BB 1 signal, the BB 2 signal, the RB signal, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the replay signal, and the setting change signal. 30 to 37 and 39 will be described below with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 30 to 37. Note that each processing described below is performed by a control microcomputer (MPU) of the collection unit 50 as described later. 579 is also implemented for each of the ports 581 to 584, the processing subject is shown as control microcomputers (MPU) 279 and 579, and the first port 581 is shown as an example of the signal input unit. The “slot machine” means a slot machine connected to each port.

  First, the presence or absence of signal change or the presence or absence of input of these BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal, and setting change signal is determined by controlling the interrupt monitoring process shown in FIG. ) 279 and 579 are constantly monitored.

  That is, in the interrupt monitoring process, as shown in FIG. 30, first, it is determined whether or not a medal IN signal is input (SK1). If no medal IN signal is input in the determination, the process goes to step SK2. Proceed to determine whether or not a medal OUT signal is input. If there is no medal OUT signal input, the process proceeds to step SK3 to determine whether or not there is a change in the BB1, BB2, and RB signals. If there is no change in the BB1 signal, BB2 signal, or RB signal in the determination, the process proceeds to step SK4 to determine whether or not a replay signal is input (SK4). Advances to step SK5 to determine whether or not a setting change signal is input (SK5). If no setting change signal is input, the process returns to step SK1. By performing the steps of K1 to SK5, setting of presence / absence of medal IN signal, presence / absence of medal OUT signal, presence / absence of change of BB1, BB2 and RB signals, presence / absence of input of replay signal, setting Monitors whether a change signal is input.

  When the medal IN signal is input to the signal input unit 278d (581d) by operating the start switch 7 and starting the game in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, The input of the medal IN signal is detected in the step SK1, and each process of SK7 to SK11 is executed together with the insertion related process of SK6 including the steps of St1 to St4 shown in FIG.

  In the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, when the game ends and the medal OUT signal is input to the signal input unit 278e (581e) in response to the occurrence of the small role winning or the replay. The detection of the input of the medal OUT signal is performed at step SK2, and the processing of SK8 to SK11 is executed together with the payout related processing of SK14 including the steps of Sh1 to Sh11 shown in FIG.

  Further, when there is a change in the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, or the RB signal, the change in the signal is detected in the step SK3, and the game state specifying process including the steps S1 to S33 shown in FIG. A set value estimation process including steps Ss1 to Ss8 shown in FIG.

  In addition, when a replay signal is input to the signal input unit 278f (581f) in response to the occurrence of replay in the corresponding slot machine 1 ′, 1 ″, the input of the replay signal is detected in step SK4. Then, the step of SK15 is performed.

  Further, when a setting change signal is input to the signal input unit 278g (581g) in response to the setting change operation being performed in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the setting change signal Input is detected in step SK5, and steps SK16 and SK17 are performed.

  First, regarding the case where the corresponding slot machine is the replay signal output type slot machine 1 ′ or the full output type slot machine 1 ″, the replay signal is input to the signal input unit 278f (581f). To explain, the input of the replay signal to the signal input unit 278f (581f) is detected in the step SK4 in the monitoring state of SK1 to SK5 and proceeds to the step SK15, and in the latest game table (FIGS. 15 and 21), After updating the item “Replay” of the latest game registered in the latest game table update process of SK9, which will be described later, to “1” and registering the occurrence of a replay winning, the process returns to the monitoring state of SK1 to SK5.

  If the corresponding slot machine is the all-output type slot machine 1 ″ and the setting change signal shown in FIG. 12C is input to the signal input unit 278g (581g), the setting is performed. Whether the input of the change signal to the signal input unit 278g (581g) is detected in the step SK5 in the monitoring state of SK1 to SK5 and proceeds to the step SK16, and whether the corresponding slot machine 1 ″ is the setting change entry type Whether or not the setting change operation is checked as a chance zone state occurrence condition is determined based on the RT related setting information.

  If it is determined in this determination that the setting change operation is not checked as a chance zone state occurrence condition, the setting change operation is performed as a chance zone state occurrence condition while returning to the monitoring state of SK1 to SK5. If it is determined that the game is checked, the game state (current) in the game information table is updated to “chance”, and 1 is added to the total number of CZ occurrences, and the setting is made based on the RT related setting information. The specified number of games corresponding to the change operation (same as BB1 in this embodiment) is specified, and the specified number of specified games is set as the number of digested games corresponding to the game state in the “chance zone” of the digest game counter.

  Next, state-specific data is newly added to today's data in the gaming state history table, and “chance” indicating the chance zone state in that gaming state, the number of times (total number of occurrences of CZ after update), and the time at that time The total number of games registered (stored) and stored in the game information table (today) as data of the total number of games, total number of inserted medals, and total number of paid-out medals (corresponding to the total number of games at that time) The total number of inserted medals (corresponding to the total number of inserted medals at that time) and the total number of paid out medals (corresponding to the total number of paid out medals at that time) are respectively registered (stored).

  Then, from the values of the total number of games, the total number of inserted medals, and the total number of paid-out medals in the newly registered state-specific data, the total number of games in the latest state-specific data that was the latest state-specific data before the new registration The total number of inserted medals and the total number of paid-out medals are respectively subtracted to calculate the number of games, the number of inserted medals, the number of paid-out medals, and the number of difference medals generated in the game state before the change, respectively. Register (store) the state-specific data in the items of the number of games, the number of inserted medals, the number of paid-out medals, and the number of difference medals in the latest status-specific data of the newly-registered status-specific data that is the status-specific data of the gaming status. Confirm and update gaming state history table.

  However, when the state-specific data is added, the total number of games in the game information table is “0”, that is, one game has not been executed, and the game state history table has the game state history data as an unconfirmed state. When only the state-specific data whose state is “normal” is registered, as described above, after the game state is updated from “normal” to “chance (1)”, the monitoring state of SK1 to SK5 Return to.

  Furthermore, based on the RT related setting information, the setting content of “Termination Chance Zone Setting” is specified, and when “Termination Chance Zone Setting” is set to “Include”, “Chance” is stored in the gaming state. A unit number obtained by adding 1 to the unit number stored in the item “unit” is stored in the state-specific data. As described above, in the case of updating to the chance (1), the unit number “1” is stored in the item “unit” to start one unit including the chance zone state, If it is set to “Do not include”, nothing is stored.

  That is, in the step SK17 in the interrupt monitoring process of the present embodiment, the corresponding slot machine 1 ″ is set as a chance zone state occurrence condition on the RT related setting screen (operation inrush model setting means) of the hall computer 140. When the change operation is checked, that is, when it is determined in step SK16 that it is set to be an operation entry type slot machine, it is determined that the setting change operation (predetermined operation) has been performed. When a predetermined operation-corresponding condition is established, that is, based on the input of a setting change signal, it is determined that a chance zone state has occurred (start), and “end chance zone setting” is set to “include” Includes a chance zone state in which the start is determined to be included in one unit (one unit period). Judging means and one unit period specifying means is formed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279,579 to implement.

  Next, when the medal IN signal is input to the signal input unit 278d (581d), the input of the medal IN signal to the signal input unit 278d (581d) is detected at SK1, and the process proceeds to SK6, and FIG. The input related process shown in FIG.

  In the insertion related process of SK6 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the number of medals used in the game (the number of inserted medals) is specified by the number of pulses constituting the input medal IN signal (St1). ). Specifically, if the number of pulses constituting the medal IN signal is 1 pulse (during bonus), the number of inserted medals is specified as 1, and the number of pulses constituting the medal IN signal is 3 pulses (in the normal gaming state, RT ( The number of inserted medals is specified as 3 during the (replay time) and in the chance zone state).

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of St2, and the number of inserted medals specified in the step of St1 is added and updated to the total number of inserted medals in the game information table. In addition, the difference medal number is updated with the update of the total inserted medal number.

  Next, the process proceeds to step St3, where 1 is added to the total number of games and the number of games between bonuses, and then the small role game counter is updated (St4).

  In the step of St4, when there is a small role in which the number of elapsed games is registered in the small role game counter, the small number is updated by adding 1 to the numerical value of the number of elapsed games of the small role. The number of elapsed games since the winning of the winning combination is counted by the small role game counter.

  In other words, when the small role game counter is updated in the step St4 of the insertion-related process of the present embodiment, the specific general prize is obtained in the Sh3 step of the payout-related process serving as a specific general prize generation specifying unit described later. The number of games since the occurrence of the cherry, watermelon, and single-piece combination is counted, and the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that performs the step St4 of the insertion-related processing constitutes the game number counting means. .

  Then, after the SK6 input related process is executed, the process proceeds to the step SK7, and the digest game number counter update process is executed.

  In the digest game number counter update process of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not a bonus signal (any one of signals BB1, BB2, and RB) is being input (ON state), and no bonus signal is input. Further, when the number of digested games (the number of games in any game state) remains in the digested game number counter (see FIG. 14), 1 is subtracted and updated from the number of digested games. In other words, as will be described later, the maximum number of games (specified number of games) set as the number of digested games by determining the replay time or the chance zone state is decremented and updated by 1 according to the input of the medal IN signal. If the number of digested games is zero, it can be determined that the maximum number of games (the number of prescribed games) has been digested.

  After the digest game number counter update process, the process proceeds to step SK8, where it is determined whether or not the bonus signal (any one of BB1, BB2, and RB) is being input (ON state).

  When these bonus signals are being input, the gaming state of the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is either the big bonus 1, the big bonus 2, or the regular bonus, so the replay time Since there is no need to determine the start and end of the game zone and the start and end of the chance zone, and there is no need to update the digest game number counter used for these determinations, the bonus signal is returned to the monitoring state of SK1 to SK5. Is not being input, the process proceeds to step SK9, and the latest game table update process shown in FIG. 32 is performed.

  In the latest game table update process of this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the process is via SK6, that is, whether or not the process is performed in response to an input of a medal IN signal ( Sg1).

  If the process is performed in response to the input of the medal IN signal, the determination is “Yes” and the process proceeds to the step of Sg2. After the new game is registered in the most recent game table, the “number of games” of the registered new game is displayed. The value of the total number of games in the game information table, that is, the game number from the start of business today, is stored in the item “”, and the time at that time acquired from the RTC 273 (573) is stored in the item “Time”. Then, the number of inserted medals specified in St1 of the insertion-related process is stored in the “number of bets” item, the initial value “0” is stored in the “replay” item, and the process is terminated.

  When the number of games registered in the most recent game table has reached 20 when registering this new game, the number of games registered in the most recent game table is deleted by deleting the oldest game. When the number of payouts in the registration data of the game immediately before the new game remains unregistered, “0” is stored in the payout number and the RT related setting information Based on the number of calculation target games specified from the above, the latest base and the latest replay occurrence rate are calculated and stored.

  Specifically, as the calculation of the base and the latest replay occurrence rate, if the number of base calculation target games is, for example, 10 games as set in the RT related setting screen of FIG. 28, the number of payouts is “0”. And a value obtained by multiplying a value obtained by dividing the sum of the “number of payouts” of the game in the most recent game table from the game storing the previous game by the sum of the “number of bets” in the most recent game table by 100, and storing it. If the number of games for which the replay occurrence rate is calculated is also 10 games, a game that has been replayed 10 games before the game in which “0” is stored as the number of payouts, that is, “1” is displayed in the “Replay” item. The replay occurrence rate may be calculated and stored with the number of games stored as the numerator and the denominator as 10 games.

  Further, when “No” is determined in the step of Sg1, this is a process performed in response to the input of the medal OUT signal via the step of SK12, and the medal OUT signal is output to the latest game table. Since the step of Sg2 has already been performed by the input of the medal IN signal at the start of the game, a new game in which the item “number of payouts” has not been registered is registered. Therefore, the “number of payouts” of the new game is registered. In this item, the number of payouts specified in the payout-related processing of SK12 described later is stored, and when the payout number matches the payout number of the replay combination corresponding to the gaming state, item data of “Replay” is stored. After updating to “1” (Sg4), the latest base and the latest replay occurrence rate are calculated and stored as described above (Sg5), and the process is terminated.

  Next, the process proceeds to step SK10, and the replay time determination process shown in FIG. 34 is performed. In the replay time determination process of the present embodiment, first, determination as to whether or not the game state at that time is a replay time (RT) that does not require the start determination of the replay time (RT), specifically, Determines whether “RT” indicating the replay time is registered in the gaming state (current) of the gaming information table.

  If it is determined that the replay time (RT) is not reached in this determination, the process proceeds to step Sr1, and if it is determined that the replay time (RT) is reached, the end of the replay time (RT) is determined. Therefore, the process proceeds to Sr10 step to be described later.

  In step Sr1, it is determined whether or not the process is subsequent to a payout-related process in SK12 described later, that is, whether or not the process is performed in response to an input of a medal OUT signal.

  If the process is subsequent to SK12, the process proceeds to step Sr3, and the RT transition determination process is performed. If the process is not subsequent to SK12, that is, the process subsequent to the aforementioned SK6 insertion-related process, that is, the medal IN signal. In the case of the process executed in response to the input, the process proceeds to step Sr2, and it is determined whether or not the base and the replay occurrence rate have been registered in the latest game table update process of SK9.

  In this determination, if the determination result is non-execution, the process proceeds to step Sr9. On the other hand, if the determination result is execution, the process proceeds to Sr3 and the RT shift determination process is performed.

  In other words, if the base and replay occurrence rates are not registered in the most recent game table update process of SK9, the medal OUT signal is output at the end of the previous game, so that at the end of the game already from SK12 Since the replay time start determination by the route is performed, the replay time start determination is not performed repeatedly, and only when the medal OUT signal is not output at the end of the previous game, the medal IN signal The replay time start determination is performed in response to the input.

  In the RT transition determination process of Sr3, the transition determination is performed by a determination method other than the independent determination method selected in the RT transition setting item on the RT related setting screen described above.

  Specifically, in the RT transition determination process, a determination method (non-independent determination) other than the bonus signal determination, which is an independent determination, in the “RT transition determination” item on the RT-related setting screen described above based on the RT-related setting information. Of these, the selected (checked) determination methods are base determination only, replay occurrence rate determination only, entry role payout determination only, base determination and replay occurrence rate determination, base determination and entry role payout determination, base determination and replay It is specified whether the occurrence rate determination or the rush combination payout determination (all).

  And the presence or absence of RT transfer is determined by each specified determination method selected. In other words, if the determination method selected (checked) is base determination and, for example, 70 is set as the threshold value as in the RT-related setting screen shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the latest value stored in the item is 70 or more, which is the threshold value. If it is 70 or more, it is determined that the replay time (RT) has been shifted.

  That is, in the RT transition determination process of the present embodiment, the transition to the replay time state is determined based on the base (information) based on the medal OUT signal input to the signal input unit 278e (581e) serving as the information input unit. doing.

  Further, if the determination method selected (checked) is the replay occurrence rate determination and, for example, “5/10” is set as the threshold as in the RT related setting screen shown in FIG. 28, It is determined whether or not the latest value stored in the “replay occurrence rate” item of the most recent game table is equal to or greater than the threshold value “5/10”. If it is equal to or greater than “5/10”, the replay time is determined. (RT) It determines with transfer.

  That is, in the RT transition determination process of this embodiment, the replay occurrence rate (information) based on the fact that the medal OUT signal input to the signal input unit 278e (581e) serving as the information input means matches the number of payouts for the replay winning. Alternatively, the transition to the replay time state is determined based on the replay occurrence rate (information) based on the input of the replay signal input to the signal input unit 278f (581f).

  In addition, if the determination method selected (checked) is the rush combination payout determination and, for example, “10” is set as the rush combination payout number as in the RT-related setting screen shown in FIG. Whether the latest value stored in the item “Number of payouts” in the most recent game table coincides with the rushing combination payout number 10 and the current game state in the game information table is “Chance zone” If it is a chance zone and the number of payouts is 10, it is determined that the transition is to RT. When the process is executed in response to the input of the medal IN signal, the latest payout number is “0”, so there is no case where the transition determination is made in the rush combination payout determination result. There is a case where the shift determination is made only when is executed in response to the input of the medal OUT signal.

  However, when the rush combination payout determination is selected (checked) simultaneously with other determination methods, only the latest value stored in the item “Number of payouts” in the most recent game table is not determined. When the number of calculation target games in other determination methods, for example, the determination method selected (checked) at the same time is base determination, and the number of calculation target games of the base is, for example, 10 games, When the value stored in the item “Number of payouts” is a determination target, and the “Number of payouts” item in the latest 10 games includes the number of payouts that matches the rush combination payout number, the transition to replay time (RT) It comes to judge.

  That is, in the replay time determination process according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the replay time state has been entered during the chance zone period, and the control microcomputers (MPUs) 279 and 579 that perform the replay time determination process perform the determination. The determination means of the present invention is formed.

  In addition, when the determination method selected (checked) is a plurality of determination methods, each determination method is individually subjected to migration determination as described above.

  Next, the process proceeds to step Sr4, and it is determined whether or not the primary determination result of all the determination methods specified as selected (checked) in the RT transition determination process of Sr3 is a transition determination.

  That is, if there is one specified determination method, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the one determination method is a transition determination. If there are two specified determination methods, the determination of the two determination methods is performed. It is determined whether or not all the results are transition determinations. If there are three specified determination methods, it is determined whether or not the determination results of the three determination methods are all transition determinations.

  If the primary determination result of all the determination methods is not a transition determination, the process proceeds from Sr4 to Sr9. On the other hand, if the primary determination result of all the determination methods is a transition determination, the process proceeds from Sr4 to Sr5. In the final determination, the game state (current) of the game information table is changed to “RT”, 1 is added to the total number of RTs in the game information table, and the replay time (RT ), Whether the gaming state before the transition is a chance zone state due to the occurrence of a big bonus (1) or a big bonus (2), and whether the gaming state is a chance zone state due to the occurrence of a regular bonus When it is specified based on the data in the table and is in the chance zone state due to the occurrence of big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) In the chance zone state due to occurrence of a regular bonus, while adding 1 to the RT number during BB-CZ and updating, 1 is added to the RT number during RB-CZ and then updated to the replay time (RT). Identify transition games.

  That is, in Sr5 of the replay time determination process of this embodiment, it is specified whether the type of the special winning combination corresponding to the chance zone state is a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), or a regular bonus. The determination means is formed by control microcomputers (MPUs) 279 and 579 that perform the replay time determination process.

  Specifically, the transition game to the replay time (RT) is identified by, for example, the determination method identified as being selected (checked) in the RT transition determination process of Sr3, for example, only the base determination. If “5” is set as the transition G corresponding to the base determination as in the RT-related setting screen shown in FIG. 28, the replay time (RT) in the game of the game number five games before that time is set. Judged to have moved to.

  Also, in the RT transition determination process of Sr3, if there are a plurality of determination methods identified as being selected (checked) and different values are set as the transition G corresponding to each determination method, A natural number obtained by rounding off the average value of the transition G values of the determination method is defined as a transition G, and it is determined that the game has been shifted to the replay time (RT) in the game of the game number before the transition G based on the calculated average from that time.

  In addition, when a plurality of determination methods identified as being selected (checked) include a rush combination payout determination, in a game in which there is a payout equal to the number of rush combination payouts within the number of games to be calculated It is determined that the time has shifted to the replay time (RT). At this time, if there are a plurality of games in which the same number of payouts as the rush combination payout number exists in the number of games to be calculated, these games with the same payout are selected (checked) redundantly. It is determined that the game has moved to the replay time (RT) in the game closest to the transition G set for the determined determination method.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the determination method of the base determination and the replay occurrence rate determination according to this embodiment is changed to the replay time (RT) when the replay time (RT) is reached. Since the values of the “base” and “replay occurrence rate” in the most recent game table gradually increase and exceed the threshold sequentially for each game after the transition, the transition to the replay time (RT) occurs when the threshold is exceeded. And the value of the transition G set corresponding to “base determination” or “replay occurrence rate determination” on the RT related setting screen, for example, FIG. If “5” is set, as in the RT-related setting screen shown in FIG. 5, the game is shifted to the replay time (RT) in the game with the game number five games before that time. And it is intended to determine that.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 40C, the rush combination payout determination according to the present embodiment is performed to the replay time (RT) in the model that shifts to the replay time (RT) when the rush combination wins during the chance zone state. This is a method for determining the transition, and it is determined that the game has been paid out in the chance zone state and the game has been paid out, and the game has been transferred to the replay time (RT). is there.

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of Sr6, and if the number of replay times (RT) transferred is the specified number of games, for example, the RT related setting screen of FIG. 28, 50 games corresponding to the selection item of “CZ medium and small role” are specified, When the selected (checked) determination method is only the rush combination payout determination, the specified number of games is determined. When the selected (checked) determination method is a determination method other than the rush combination payout determination, When the determination method in which the number of games obtained by subtracting the number of transition G from the specified prescribed number of games is selected (checked) is the rush combination payout determination and other determination methods, the rush combination within the calculation target game number The number of games obtained by subtracting the number of games up to a game that has been paid out in the same amount as the number of payouts is set as the number of digested games corresponding to the replay time of the digested game number counter.

  Next, the process proceeds to step Sr7, where the gaming state of the replay time (RT) that has been transferred is registered in the gaming state history table and the gaming state history table is updated. Specifically, the number of occurrences (number of times) of the transferred replay time (RT) on that day is specified by the total number of RTs in the updated game information table, and state-specific data is newly added. Register and store (store) “RT”, the number of times, and the time stored in the most recent game table corresponding to the game determined to have shifted to RT as the gaming state of the additionally registered state-specific data. In the “total number of games” item, the game number of the game identified as transitioned is stored, and in the “total number of inserted medals” item, the total number of bets until the game identified as transitioned is stored. The number subtracted from the total number of medals at that time is stored, and in the item “total number of medals paid out”, the total number of payouts up to the game identified as the transition is subtracted from the total number of medals at that time. Store things.

  And it progresses to the step of Sr7 + and a 1 unit start determination process is implemented. In this one-unit start determination process, if the gaming state before the replay time (RT) that has been transferred, that is, the gaming state in which the replay time (RT) has occurred is the normal gaming state, The unit number obtained by adding 1 to the largest number already stored as the unit number is stored in the “unit” item of the data classified by state of the replay time (RT) that is determined to be started and additionally registered in the gaming state history table And register the start of a new unit.

  In addition, the game state before the replay time (RT) that has been transferred is the chance zone state, and the start of the chance zone state is a new unit start in the item “unit” of the state data of the chance zone state. If the unit number has already been stored, it is determined that one unit is continued, and the “unit” item of the replay time (RT) state-specific data additionally registered in the gaming state history table If the “unit” item of the chance zone state data is not registered, the start point of the chance zone state is set to a new unit number. It is determined that the start has started, and the most frequently stored unit number in the “unit” item of the state-specific data in the chance zone state and the additionally registered replay time (RT) state-specific data Kina store unit numbers obtained by adding 1 to the number, and registers the start of a new unit.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sr8, and the display of the replay time (RT) rush rate that is displayed at the time of rush (start) of the chance zone state before the transition of the replay time (RT) (see FIG. 44C). Is being displayed, the display is terminated to obtain the default table data screen (FIG. 43), and then the process is terminated.

  Next, the processing after Sr9 for determining the end of the replay time (RT), which is shifted when determined “No” in the steps of Sr2 and Sr4, will be described below.

  In step Sr9, it is first determined whether or not the current gaming state is the replay time (RT), specifically, whether or not “RT” is registered in the gaming state (current) of the gaming information table. Determine whether or not.

  If it is determined in this determination that the replay time (RT) is not reached, it is not necessary to determine the end of the replay time (RT), so that the process ends, while it is determined that the replay time (RT) is reached. In this case, the process proceeds to Sr10, and the process after Sr10 is performed to determine whether or not the replay time (RT) has ended.

  First, in step Sr10, based on the RT related setting information, it is determined whether or not the game number determination is checked (selected) in the RT end determination item on the RT related setting screen, and the game number determination is checked (selected). If not, the process proceeds to step Sr11. On the other hand, if the game number determination is checked (selected), the process proceeds to Sr20 to determine whether the specified game number for the replay time (RT) has been digested. The determination is made based on whether or not the number of digested games corresponding to the replay time of the number counter is “0”.

  If the determination is “0”, the process proceeds to step Sr14 to determine the end of the replay time (RT), while the determination is not “0” (“ If it is determined that the number of digested games is not set to “0” (including a state of “−” in which nothing is set), the process proceeds to step Sr11.

  In step Sr11, as in step Sr2, it is determined whether or not the base and replay occurrence rates have been registered in the most recent game table update process in SK9. In this case, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result is “execution”, the process proceeds to Sr12 to execute the RT end determination process.

  In other words, if the base and replay occurrence rates are not registered in the most recent game table update process of SK9, the medal OUT signal is output at the end of the previous game, so that at the end of the game already from SK12 Since the replay time end determination by the route is performed, the replay time end determination is not performed redundantly, and only when the medal OUT signal is not output at the end of the previous game, the medal IN signal The end of the replay time is determined in response to the input.

  In the RT end determination process of the present embodiment, a determination method other than the bonus signal determination and the game number determination, which are independent determinations, in the “RT end determination” item on the RT related setting screen described above based on the RT related setting information. Among (non-independent determination), the selected (checked) determination method is only base determination, only replay occurrence determination, only falling role payout determination, base determination and replay occurrence rate determination, base determination and falling role payout determination The base determination, the replay occurrence rate determination, and the falling combination payout determination (all) are specified.

  And the presence or absence of RT (replay time) end is determined by each specified determination method. In other words, if the determination method selected (checked) is base determination and, for example, 70 is set as the threshold value as in the RT-related setting screen shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the latest value stored in the item is 70 or less, which is the threshold value. If it is 70 or less, it is determined that RT (replay time) has ended.

  Further, if the determination method selected (checked) is the replay occurrence rate determination and, for example, “5/10” is set as the threshold as in the RT related setting screen shown in FIG. 28, It is determined whether or not the latest value stored in the “replay occurrence rate” item of the most recent game table is less than or equal to the threshold value “5/10”. It is determined that the replay time has ended.

  Further, the determination method selected (checked) is the falling combination payout determination. For example, as shown in the RT-related setting screen shown in FIG. If “2” is set, it is determined whether or not the latest value stored in the item of “number of payouts” in the most recent game table matches 2, which is the number of falling combination payouts. If the number is 2, it is determined that RT (replay time) has ended. When the process is performed in response to the input of the medal IN signal, the latest payout number is “0”, and therefore the end determination is not made in the fallen combination payout determination result. There is a case where the end determination is made only when is executed in response to the input of the medal OUT signal.

  However, when the falling combination payout determination is selected (checked) at the same time as other determination methods, only the latest value stored in the item “Number of payouts” in the most recent game table is not determined. When the number of calculation target games in other determination methods, for example, the determination method selected (checked) at the same time is base determination, and the number of calculation target games of the base is, for example, 10 games, The value stored in the item “number of payouts” is set as a determination target, and when the number of payouts corresponding to the number of fallen combination payouts in the item “number of payouts” of these latest 10 games is determined to end. ing.

  In addition, when the determination method selected (checked) is a plurality of determination methods, the end determination is individually performed for each determination method as described above.

  That is, in this embodiment, the number of digest games based on the medal IN signal, the number and base of payout based on the medal OUT signal, the replay occurrence rate based on the match of the payout number based on the medal OUT signal, and the replay signal The end of the replay time state is specified by the replay occurrence rate based on the input, and the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, and the replay signal correspond to the replay time end information that can specify the end of the replay time state.

  Next, the process proceeds to step Sr13, and it is determined in the RT transition determination process of Sr12 whether or not the primary determination result of all determination methods identified as selected (checked) is an end determination.

  That is, if there is one specified determination method, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the one determination method is an end determination. If there are two specified determination methods, the determination of the two determination methods is performed. It is determined whether or not all the results are end determinations. If there are three specified determination methods, it is determined whether or not the determination results of the three determination methods are all end determinations.

  Then, when the primary determination result of all the determination methods is not the end determination, the process ends. On the other hand, when the primary determination result of all the determination methods is the end determination, the process proceeds from Sr13 to Sr14, and the replay time is reached. Final determination is made as to completion of (RT).

  Specifically, for example, in the RT end determination process of Sr10, the determination method identified as being selected (checked) is, for example, only base determination, as in the RT related setting screen shown in FIG. If “5” is set as the transition G corresponding to the base determination, it is determined that the replay time (RT) has ended in the game of the game number five games before that time.

  Also, in the RT end determination process of Sr10, if there are a plurality of determination methods identified as being selected (checked) and different values are set as the transition G corresponding to each determination method, The natural number obtained by rounding off the average value of the transition G values of the determination method is defined as the transition G, and it is determined that the replay time (RT) has ended in the game of the game number before the transition G based on the average calculated from that time.

  In addition, when a plurality of determination methods identified as selected (checked) includes a falling combination payout determination, in a game in which the same amount as the falling combination payout number in the calculation target game number has been paid It is determined that the replay time (RT) has ended. At this time, if there are a plurality of games in the calculation target game number that have the same payout as the number of falling role payouts, the games that have the same payout are selected (checked) in duplicate. It is determined that the replay time (RT) has ended in the game closest to the transition G set for the determination method being set.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the determination method of the base determination and the replay occurrence rate determination according to the present embodiment is changed to the replay time (RT) when the replay time (RT) ends. Since the values of the “base” and “replay occurrence rate” in the most recent game table gradually decrease below the threshold value for each game after the transition, the replay time (RT) ends when the value falls below the threshold value. And the end of the replay time (RT) at the end of the replay time (RT), the transition G value set corresponding to “base determination” or “replay occurrence rate determination” on the RT related setting screen, for example, FIG. If “5” is set as in the RT-related setting screen shown in FIG. 5, the replay time (RT) ends in the game with the game number five games before that time. And it is intended to determine that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (c), the falling combination payout determination of the present embodiment is performed with a replay time (RT) in a model in which the replay time (RT) ends when the falling combination wins during the replay time (RT). ), And the replay time (RT) has ended in the game in which the payout has been performed as a result of the same payout being made during the replay time (RT). Judgment.

  After determining the end of the replay time (RT), the process proceeds to step Sr15 to determine whether or not the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ”is a re-entry type, that is,“ chance zone ”on the RT related setting screen. In the item “”, it is determined based on the RT related setting information whether or not the “re-entry” sub-item is selected (checked).

  If it is determined that the re-entry type is determined in this determination, the process proceeds to step Sr16, where the end of the replay time (RT) is determined as the start of a new chance zone state, and the game state (current) in the game information table is set. In addition to updating to “chance” and adding 1 to the total number of CZs of today's data, the process proceeds to step Sr17 where the newly generated chance zone state is registered and the gaming state history table is updated.

  That is, in the replay time determination process of the present embodiment, “Yes” in the step of Sr15, that is, the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ”displays the RT-related setting screen (re-entry model setting means). ), The end of the replay time state is specified, the end of the specified replay time state is determined as the occurrence of a new chance zone state, A new chance zone state is included in one unit (one unit period) of the replay time. The control microcomputers (MPU) 279 and 579 for executing the replay time determination process determine the determination unit and the one unit period specifying unit. Is formed.

  Specifically, the number of occurrences (the number of times) of the chance zone state for which the occurrence is determined on that day is specified by the total number of CZs in the updated game information table, and new state-specific data is added. Register and store the “chance” and the number of times as the gaming state of the additionally registered state-specific data, specify the next game after the game determined that the replay time (RT) has ended, that is, the start game, The time stored in the latest game table corresponding to the start game is registered (stored), and the game number of the specified start game is stored in the item “total number of games”. ”Is stored as the total number of bets until the specified start game is subtracted from the total number of medals at that time, and the item“ total payout medals ”is stored up to the specified start game. Payment The total of the number subtracted from the total number of medals inserted at that time is stored, and the “Unit” item has the same unit number stored in the “Unit” item of the previous status data. The unit number is stored (Sr17).

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sr18, and if it is the specified number of games in the re-entry chance zone state, for example, the RT-related setting screen in FIG. 28, the 10 games set corresponding to the sub-item “re-entry” are identified. In addition, when the selected (checked) determination method is only the falling combination payout determination, the specified number of games is used. When the selected (checked) determination method is a determination method other than the falling combination payout determination The number of games obtained by subtracting the number of transition G from the specified prescribed number of games is included in the number of games to be calculated when the determination method selected (checked) is the falling combination payout determination and other determination methods. The number of games obtained by subtracting the number of games up to the game that had the same payout amount as the number of falling role payouts in is set as the number of digested games corresponding to the chance zone state of the digested game number counter. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), various types of RT rush rate data at that time are calculated, and the display of the RT rush rate screen including the calculated RT rush rate data is started (Sr19). Exit.

  In the display of the RT entry rate data, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), the display of the RT entry rate data corresponding to the type of the chance zone at that time is displayed greatly. In the RT entry rate screen in the step, since the type of the chance zone state is a chance zone state due to the end of the replay time (RT), the RT entry rate screen in which the display of the RT entry rate (other than BB and RB) is expanded It is said.

  These various RT entry rate data are calculated based on the BB1 count, BB2 count, RB count, total RT count, total CZ count, BB-CZ RT count, and RB-CZ RT count in the game information table at that time. The

  Specifically, the total RT entry rate is calculated by dividing the total number of RTs by the total number of CZs, and the RT entry rate (BB) is the RT number in BB-CZ, which is the sum of the number of BB1 times and the number of BB2 times ( The RT entry rate (RB) is calculated by dividing by the number of occurrences of a chance zone with a big bonus. The RT entry rate (RB) is calculated by dividing the number of RTs in the RB-CZ by the number of RBs (number of occurrences of a chance zone with a regular bonus). The RT entry rate (other than BB and RB) is calculated by dividing the number of RTs in BB-CZ and the number of RTs in RB-CZ by the total number of CZs. Is calculated by dividing the sum of the BB1 times, the BB2 times, and the RB times (corresponding to the number of occurrences of the chance zone by the big bonus and the regular bonus) by the number of times reduced.

  However, if only BB1 is checked as the chance zone start condition, only the BB1 number is used instead of the sum of the BB1 number and the BB2 number. If only BB2 is checked as the chance zone start condition, BB1 is set. Instead of the total number of times and the number of BB2 times, only the number of BB2 times is assumed.

  That is, in Sr19 of the replay time determination process, the RT that can specify the ratio of the total RT count (replay time transition count) to the total CZ count (chance zone occurrence count) counted in the game information table (counting means). RT number in BB-CZ, RT number in RB-CZ with respect to rush rate (replay time rush rate specifying information) and number of chance zone occurrences for each type of special winning combination (total of BB1 and BB2 times, RB count) The RT entry rate (BB) and the RT entry rate (RB), which are replay time entry rate specifying information capable of specifying the ratio of the number of replay time transitions), are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 266 constituting the display screen 261. The control microcomputer (MPU) 279 for executing the replay time determination process and the liquid crystal display device 266 perform the replay time entry rate characteristic. Information display means are formed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the re-entry type in the determination of Sr15, the process proceeds to the step of Sr21, the game state after the end of the replay time (RT) is determined as the normal game state, and the end of the replay time (RT). Is determined to be the end of one unit (Sr22).

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sr23, where the game state (current) in the game information table is updated to “normal”, and the newly generated normal game state is registered to update the game state history table.

  Specifically, the state-specific data is additionally registered, “normal” is registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the replay time (RT) is determined to have ended. The next game, that is, the start game in the normal game state is specified, the time stored in the most recent game table corresponding to the start game is registered (stored), and the item “total number of games” includes the specification The game number of the selected start game is stored, and in the item “total number of inserted medals”, the total number of wagers up to the specified start game is subtracted from the total number of inserted medals at that time. In the item “number of paid-out medals”, the total number of paid-outs up to the specified starting game is subtracted from the total number of inserted medals at that time, and the game unit is based on the end determination of the game unit described above. Store "-" Together, as described above, determined by calculating the necessary data of the previous states by the data of the state-specific data.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sr24, "-" is updated and stored in each digested game number counter of the digested game number counter, and the digested game number counter is initialized (reset), and then the process ends.

  After determining the start and end of the replay in the replay determination process of SK10, the process proceeds to the step of SK11, and the chance zone determination process shown in FIG. 35 is performed.

  In the chance zone determination process of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, first, based on the RT related setting information, the model (type) in which the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ generates a chance zone state. In the case of a model (type) that does not generate a chance zone state, it is not necessary to determine the start (occurrence) or end of the chance zone state in the first place, and thus the process ends. On the other hand, if the model (type) generates the chance zone state, the process proceeds to step Sz2, and it is determined whether or not the game state at that time is the normal game state.

  If it is determined that the game state is not the normal game state, specifically, if the player is already in the chance zone state or the replay time (RT), the process proceeds to step Sz10, but if the game state is the normal game state, the process proceeds to Sz3. Then, based on the RT related setting information, the chance zone occurrence condition of the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is identified, and the chance zone occurrence condition establishment determination is made to determine whether or not the identified chance zone occurrence condition is established Perform the process.

  Specifically, in the chance zone occurrence condition establishment determination process of the present embodiment, each selected (checked) in the “occurrence condition” sub-item of the “chance zone” item of the RT related setting screen shown in FIG. Among the selection items of the generation conditions, specify whether the selection item of the generation conditions other than BB1, BB2, RB, and the setting change operation, “small role” or “number of games for big hit” is selected (checked), If it is selected (checked), it is determined whether or not the conditions for generating these “small role” or “number of big hit games” are satisfied.

  That is, when “small role” is selected (checked), the number of payouts of the latest game stored in the most recent game table is set in accordance with the selection item of “small role”. It is determined whether or not the condition for generating a “small role” is satisfied based on whether or not it matches the number of payouts, and if “the number of big hit games” is selected (checked), the game at that time Depending on whether or not the number of games between bonuses stored in the data in the information table today matches the number of games set in correspondence with the selection item of “number of games for jackpot”, It is determined whether or not the generation condition is satisfied.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sz4, and it is determined whether or not any of the generation conditions selected (checked) is satisfied. If neither of the generation conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sz10. On the other hand, if any occurrence condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sz5, where it is determined that a chance zone state has occurred, and the game state (current) in the game information table is changed to “chance”. Add 1 to the number of CZs.

  Then, in step Sz6, the number of specified games corresponding to the established generation condition is specified, and the specified number of specified games is set to the number of digested games corresponding to the chance zone of the digested game number counter. The chance zone state is registered and the gaming state history table is updated (Sz7).

  Specifically, the number of occurrences (the number of times) of the chance zone state for which the occurrence is determined on that day is specified by the total number of CZs in the updated game information table, and new state-specific data is added. Register and store (store) “chance” and the number of times, and the time at that time as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, as data of the total number of games, the total number of inserted medals, and the total number of paid-out medals The total number of games stored in the game information table (today) at that time (corresponding to the total number of games at that time), the total number of inserted medals (corresponding to the total number of inserted medals at that time), the total number of paid-out medals ( (Corresponding to the total number of paid-out medals at that time), and as described above, the necessary data of the state-specific data immediately before the state-specific data is calculated. To confirm Te.

  Next, the process proceeds to step Sz8, and a 1-unit start determination process is performed in which 1-unit start determination is performed according to the setting. Specifically, based on the 1-unit related setting information, when “include” is selected in the termination chance zone setting on the 1-unit related setting screen (see FIG. 29), the start of the chance zone state is determined. It is determined that one unit is started, and the unit number obtained by adding 1 to the largest number already stored as the unit number is stored in the “unit” of the state-specific data additionally registered in the step of Sz7. If “not include” is selected, if there is no transition to the replay time (RT) during the generated chance zone state, the chance zone state itself is 1 unit. Therefore, since the start of the chance zone state cannot be set as one unit, nothing is stored in the “unit” of the additionally registered state-specific data.

  The “unit” item of the additionally registered state-specific data includes the chance zone state in the step Sr7 ′ in the transition determination when the transition to the replay time (RT) is made during the chance zone state. By determining that the start of one unit is the start of one unit, a new unit number of one unit is stored, while the chance zone state ends without shifting to the replay time (RT) during the chance zone state. In this case, as will be described later, “−” is stored by the end of the chance zone state.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sz9, and various RT entry rate data at that time are calculated in the same manner as the calculation method in step Sr19, and display of the RT entry rate screen including the calculated RT entry rate data is started. Then, the process ends.

  Next, a description will be given of the processing after Sz10 for determining the end of the chance zone state, which is shifted when it is determined as “No” in the steps of Sz2 and Sz4 described above. First, in the step of Sz10, It is determined whether or not the game state at that time is a chance zone state.

  If it is determined in this determination that the state is not the chance zone state, it is not necessary to determine the end of the chance zone state, so that the processing ends without performing the processing after Sz10, while the state is the chance zone state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sz11, where the chance zone end condition of the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is specified based on the RT related setting information, and it is determined whether or not the specified chance zone end condition is satisfied. A chance zone end condition establishment determination process is performed.

  Specifically, in the chance zone end condition establishment determination process of the present embodiment, the end selected (checked) in the “end condition” sub-item of the “chance zone” item of the RT related setting screen shown in FIG. The condition is specified, and it is determined whether or not the selected (checked) end condition is satisfied.

  That is, when “game number digest” is selected (checked), “game number digest” depends on whether the digest game number corresponding to the “chance zone” of the digest game number counter is “0”. It is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied, and when “falling small role” is selected (checked), the latest value stored in the “number of payouts” item of the most recent game table is It is determined whether or not the end condition of the “tumbling small combination” is satisfied, depending on whether or not the number of coins to be paid out of the falling combination set to 2 is set in the selection item of the “falling small combination”.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sz12, where it is determined whether or not any of the end conditions selected (checked) is satisfied, and if none of the end conditions is satisfied, the process ends. On the other hand, if any of the end conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sz13, where it is determined that the chance zone state is ended, the game state (current) in the game information table is changed to “normal”, and Sz14 It is determined that one unit is finished.

  That is, in the step Sz12 of the chance zone determination process of the present embodiment, the RT of the hall computer 140 serving as the chance zone end condition setting means is used as the end condition of the chance zone state of the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. When “game number consumption” indicating the consumption of a predetermined number of games is set (selected) on the related setting screen, the medal IN signal (input to the signal input unit 278d (581d) serving as information input means) The end of the chance zone state is determined based on the number of games based on the game execution information), that is, the number of digested games corresponding to the chance zone of the digest game number counter is “0”, while the corresponding slot machine 1, As the end condition for the 1 ′, 1 ″ chance zone state, the hallcoord serving as the chance zone end condition setting means When “falling small combination” which is a prize for a predetermined falling combination is set (selected) on the RT-related setting screen of the computer 140, it is input to the signal input unit 278e (581e) serving as information input means. The chance zone state based on the fact that the number of payouts (number of game media to be given) specified from the grant information (medal OUT signal) matches the number of medals (number of game media to be given) to be paid out when a fallen combination occurs. The control means (MPU) 279 and 579 for executing the chance zone determination process form determination means and 1 unit period specifying means.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sz15, and based on the 1 unit related setting information, it is determined whether or not “include” is selected in the termination chance zone setting on the 1 unit related setting screen (see FIG. 29) described above.

  If it is determined that “include” is selected in the determination, the process proceeds to step Sz16, and the gaming state history table is updated so that the finished chance zone is included in the finished gaming unit. Specifically, state-specific data is additionally registered, “normal” as the gaming state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the time at that time are registered (stored), and the total number of games and total number of inserted medals As the data of the total number of paid-out medals, the total number of games (corresponding to the total number of games at that time) stored in the game information table (today) at that time, the total number of inserted medals (the total number of inserted medals at that time) Equivalent) and the total number of paid-out medals (corresponding to the total number of paid-out medals at that time) are registered (stored), respectively, and the data by state immediately before the data by state, that is, the state of the finished chance zone state In addition to calculating the necessary data for other data, the “unit” item of the chance zone status data is the latest status data of the chance zone status data. By storing items Unit numbers and the same unit numbers stored in the "unit" of the chances zone state is determined a different said state data to be included in one unit.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that “include” is not selected in the determination in the step Sz15, that is, “not include” is selected, the process proceeds to the step Sz19, and the finished chance zone is the ended game unit. The gaming state history table is updated so as not to be included in the game. Specifically, state-specific data is additionally registered, “normal” as the gaming state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the time at that time are registered (stored), and the total number of games and total number of inserted medals As the data of the total number of paid-out medals, the total number of games (corresponding to the total number of games at that time) stored in the game information table (today) at that time, the total number of inserted medals (the total number of inserted medals at that time) Equivalent) and the total number of paid-out medals (corresponding to the total number of paid-out medals at that time) are registered (stored), respectively, and the data by state immediately before the data by state, that is, the state of the finished chance zone state In addition to calculating the necessary data for other data and storing “-” in the “unit” item of the state-specific data in the chance zone state, as in the normal gaming state, Zone state is determined a different said state data so as not included in one unit.

  That is, in the chance zone determination process of the present embodiment, when “include” is not selected in the end chance zone setting, it is determined that the chance zone ends without shifting to the replay time state during the generated chance zone state. In this case, one unit (one unit period) that does not include the period of the completed chance zone state that is the target of the determination of the transition to the replay time.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sz17, where “−” is updated and stored in each digested game number of the digested game number counter, the digested game number counter is initialized (reset), and then the chance zone state that has ended (start) ) If the display of the replay time (RT) rush rate (see FIG. 44 (c)) at which the display was started is being displayed, the display is ended and the default table data screen (FIG. 43) is displayed. (Sz18), the process ends.

  As described above, the replay time determination process described above is performed in SK10, and the chance zone determination process described above is performed in step SK11, so that it depends on other than the occurrence and termination of big bonus 1, big bonus 2, and regular bonus The replay time (RT) and the transition (start) and end of the chance zone state are determined.

  That is, in this embodiment, occurrence of a chance zone state is determined in the above-described chance zone determination process and a gaming state specifying process described later, and the transition to the replay time state in the generated chance zone state is described above. The determination means in the present invention is formed by control microcomputers (MPU) 279 and 579 that perform the chance zone determination process, the replay time determination process, and the game state specifying process.

  Next, the flow of processing performed when the medal OUT signal is input to the signal input unit 278e will be described. The input of the medal OUT signal to the signal input unit 278e is detected at SK2 and proceeds to SK12. First, the payout-related process shown in FIG. 31 is performed.

  In the payout-related processing of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, first, the number of medals paid out (number of payout medals) is specified by the number of pulses constituting the input medal OUT signal. Specifically, if the number of pulses constituting the medal OUT signal is 1 pulse, the number of payout medals is specified as 1. If the number of pulses constituting the medal OUT signal is 3 pulses, the number of payout medals is specified as 3. If the number of pulses constituting the medal OUT signal is 5, the number of payout medals is specified as 5, and if the number of pulses constituting the medal OUT signal is 10 pulses, the number of payout medals is specified as 10, and the medal OUT signal is specified. If the number of configured pulses is 15, the number of payout medals is specified as 15 (Sh1).

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of Sh2, and the number of payout medals specified in the step of Sh1 is added and updated to the total number of payout medals in the game information table. In addition, the difference medal number is updated with the update of the total payout medal number.

  Next, the process proceeds to the step of Sh3, and the occurrence of duplicate winning small combinations capable of overlapping winning (simultaneous winning) corresponding to the number of payout medals specified in the step of Sh1 is specified.

  Specifically, it is based on the setting contents in the item of the setting of the number of overlapping winning small part numbers in the overlapping winning related number setting screen of FIG. 27, that is, the setting data of overlapping winning small part number in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276 (576). According to the setting data, if the specified number of payout medals is 4, it is specified that a cherry has occurred, and if the specified number of payout medals is 5, it is specified that a watermelon has occurred, and the specified number of payout medals is 1. If there is, it is specified that one winning combination has occurred.

  That is, the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of the present embodiment is based on the input of the medal OUT signal serving as the specific general winning information to the signal input unit 278e (581e) serving as the information input means in the Sh3 step of the payout related processing. A control microcomputer that identifies which specific general winning among a plurality of types of specific general winnings, such as cherry, watermelon, and one-piece combination, has occurred, and performs the Sh3 step of the payout-related processing (MPU) 279 and 579 form specific general winning occurrence specifying means.

  If the specified number of payout medals is “3” due to the occurrence of replay or “10” due to the occurrence of a bell winning, it is determined that a winning combination other than the double winning winning combination has occurred.

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of Sh4, where it is determined whether or not the occurrence of the duplicate winning small combination is specified in the step of Sh3, and in the case where it is determined that the generation of the duplicate winning small combination is not specified, that is, When the number of payout medals is 3 or 10, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the determination of Sh4 that the occurrence of a duplicate winning small combination is specified, the process proceeds to step Sh5 to play a game. 1 is added to the number of winnings of the small role specified in the step of Sh3 of the information table (today's data).

  Specifically, if the small combination identified in the step of Sh3 is cherry, 1 is added to the number of cherry winnings (today's data) in the game information table, and if the small combination identified in the step of Sh3 is watermelon, 1 is added to the number of watermelon winnings (today's data) in the game information table, and 1 is added to the number of winnings (today's data) in the gaming information table if the small role identified in the step of Sh3 is one. .

  In other words, in the Sh5 step of the payout-related process of the present embodiment, the number of occurrences for each type of the specific general prize, the occurrence of which is specified by the Sh3 step of the payout-related process serving as the specific general prize occurrence specifying means. A control microcomputer that performs the Sh5 step of the payout-related processing by adding and updating 1 to the number of cherry winnings, the number of watermelon winnings, and the number of winning one piece in the game information table. MPU) 279 and 579 constitute a specific general winning number counting means.

  Next, the process proceeds to step Sh6 to update the small role game counter. Specifically, in the step of Sh6, by setting “0” to the elapsed game number of the small role game counter corresponding to the small role specified in the step of Sh3 and initializing it, St4 of the above-described input related processing is performed. In addition to setting the number of games to be added in step S4, and setting “-” to the number of elapsed games of each small role other than the specified small role, Update the small role game counter to exclude.

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of Sh6, and the setting contents in the item of the setting of the duplicate winning expectation display setting in the duplicate winning related display screen of FIG. 27, that is, the duplicate winning expectation display setting data in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276. Based on the setting data based on it, it is determined whether or not the expectation level display setting has been made. If the expectation level display setting has not been made, the process is terminated, whereas if the expectation level display setting has been made, Sh8 is set. In step 3, the small winning combination identified in the step Sh3, for example, the number of duplicate wins of the watermelon, that is, whether or not the number of duplicate winning watermelon wins (today's data) in the game information table is “0”, that is, If the elapsed time from the start of business is short or the game time in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is short, Duplicate win count on it is determined whether or not the case is "0".

  If the number of duplicate wins is “0”, the process proceeds to step Sh11, and the number of duplicate winners watermelon wins (previous day data) with respect to the number of watermelon wins (previous day data) that is the small role identified in step Sh3. And the ratio (%) of the watermelon-BB1 double win count (previous day data) to the watermelon win count (previous day data) and the watermelon-BB2 double win count (previous day data) Data) and the ratio (%) of the number of watermelon-RB duplicated winnings (previous day data) to the number of watermelon winnings (previous day data), then proceeded to the step of Sh10 to calculate these. The respective percentages (%) are displayed on the display screen 261 as various overlapping winning expectation degrees (see FIG. 43B).

  On the other hand, if the number of duplicate winnings is not “0”, the process proceeds from step Sh8 to step Sh9, and the number of times of winning the winning watermelon (today's data) with respect to the number of times of winning the watermelon (today's data) that is the small role identified in the step of Sh3. ) And the ratio (%) of the watermelon-BB1 duplicate win count (today data) to the watermelon win count (today data) and the watermelon-BB2 duplicate win count to the watermelon win count (today data) ( After calculating the ratio (%) to today's data) and the ratio (%) of the number of watermelon-RB duplicate wins (today's data) to the number of watermelon prizes (today's data), proceed to the step of Sh10 to calculate these After each percentage (%) is displayed on the display screen 261 as various duplicate winning expectation degrees as shown in FIG. 43B, the processing is terminated.

  In other words, in Sh10 of the payout-related process of the present embodiment, when the occurrence of a cherry, watermelon, and one winning combination that becomes a specific general prize is specified by the step of Sh3 of the payout-related process serving as the specific general prize occurrence specifying means. In addition, for the specific general winning number of the small role whose occurrence is specified, which is counted in the game information table serving as the specific general winning number counting means, that is, the cherry winning number, the watermelon winning number, and the one-sheet winning number, The number of duplicate winning special winnings counted in the game information table, the number of duplicate winning cherry winnings, the number of overlapping winning watermelon winnings, and the number of overlapping winning one piece winnings, the total overlapping winning expectation degree of the generated small role (%) And a big bonus (1) for the number of winnings of the small role that has occurred (any one of cherry winnings, watermelon winnings, or 1 winning) BB1 duplicate winning expectation (%) of the generated small role, which is the ratio of the number of duplicate winnings (cherry-BB1 overlapping winnings, watermelon-BB1 overlapping winnings, 1 sheet-BB1 overlapping winnings) Big Bonus (2) duplicated winnings (Cherry-BB2 overlapping winnings, watermelon-BB2 overlapping winnings, 1) -BB2 double win count), and the expected BB2 double win expectation (%) of the generated small role, and the win count of the generated small role (cherry win count, watermelon win count, or single win count) The number of regular bonus duplicated wins (cherry-RB double wins, watermelon-RB double wins, 1 sheet-RB double wins) RB overlapped winning expectation degree (%) of the small role is displayed, and the overlapping winning expectation degree information display means is configured by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 and the liquid crystal display device 266 that perform the step of Sh10. .

  In these steps of Sh10, the display counter is reset to the initial state in which the predetermined number of games 5 is set, and the value of the display counter is set so that the small role game counter is in the above-described step of St4. When it is updated, 1 is subtracted and updated, and when the value of the display counter becomes 0, or as shown in FIG. 43 (c), a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2) or a regular bonus is generated. When this is done, the display of these various duplicated winning expectations is terminated.

  In this embodiment, each percentage (%) is calculated and the calculated percentage (%) is displayed as the duplicate winning expectation degree. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As the duplicated winning expectation, for example, when the number of watermelon winnings (today's data) is 60 and the number of overlapping winning watermelon winnings (today's data) is 5, without calculating these ratios. , So that these percentages can be identified by the player or the like, it may be displayed as “5 out of a total of 60 times are duplicate winners”.

  Then, after the SK12 payout-related processing is performed, the process proceeds to the above-described step SK8, and the above-described steps SK8 to SK11 are performed, so that the input of the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal is performed. When there is no (not ON), that is, when the gaming state is other than the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the latest game table update process (Sg4 and Sg5 are performed) and the replay time By executing the determination process and the chance zone determination process, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the replay time (RT) other than the occurrence and termination of the regular bonus, and the transition (start) of the chance zone state And end.

  Next, the flow of processing when there is a change in the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal will be described. When there is a change in the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal, the change is performed at the step SK3. Detected and proceeds to SK13, the game state specifying process shown in FIG. 36 is performed, and the set value estimating process shown in FIG. 37 of SK14 is executed.

  In the game state specifying process of Sk13 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, first, by performing each step of S1 and S11, whether the changed signal is the BB1 signal or the BB2 signal. , RB signal is specified. If “No” in S11, this corresponds to a change in the RB signal.

  When the changed signal is the BB1 signal, it is determined as “Yes” in the step S1, and the process proceeds to the step S2, and the change in the BB1 signal is changed from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state. That is, it is determined whether or not the input state of the BB1 signal after the change is “ON”.

  If the change in the BB1 signal is not a change from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state in the determination, that is, if the input state of the BB1 signal after the change is in the “OFF” state, the process proceeds to step S27. On the other hand, if the input state of the BB1 signal after the change is “ON”, the process proceeds to step S3, and the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is specially accompanied by the transition to the big bonus (1). It is determined that a winning “red 7-red 7-red 7” has occurred.

  Then, proceeding to the step of S3 ′, if the gaming state at that time, that is, the gaming state in which the big bonus (1) has occurred is the replay time (RT), the occurrence of the big bonus (1) is the replay time ( It is determined whether or not the termination condition of (RT) is not met.

  Specifically, based on the RT-related setting information, whether or not bonus signal determination is selected (checked) in the RT end determination of the replay time item on the RT-related setting screen is specified and selected (checked). If not, it is determined that the occurrence of the big bonus (1) is not applicable to the replay time (RT) termination condition, and if it is selected (checked), the occurrence of the big bonus (1) occurs. It is determined that the replay time (RT) end condition is met.

  If it is determined to be applicable, the process proceeds to step S3 ′ +, where it is determined that the replay time (RT) before the occurrence of the big bonus (1) has ended and the digest game counter is initialized (reset). When the process proceeds to step S4, on the other hand, if it is determined not to be applicable, it is determined that the replay time (RT) before the occurrence of the big bonus (1) does not end, and the process passes through the step S3 ′ +. In other words, the process proceeds to step S4 while the digest game counter is not initialized (reset) and the number of digest games corresponding to the replay time (RT) is maintained. It should be noted that the number of digest games held in this way is not subtracted and updated during the generated big bonus (1), so it is held until the end of the big bonus (1).

  If the gaming state when the big bonus (1) occurs is the chance zone state, it is determined that the chance zone state has ended due to the occurrence of the big bonus (1), and the digest game counter is initialized. (Reset) and proceed to step S4.

  In step S4, the game state of today's data in the game state history table is updated to “BB1”, and 1 is added to the number of BB1 times of today's data.

  That is, in step S4 of the game state specifying process of the present embodiment, by adding 1 to the BB1 number forming the winning type special winning number specifying information, the number of BB1 is counted, and the game state specifying The control microcomputers (MPUs) 279 and 579 that implement the step of S4 of the process constitute a winning type special winning number specific information counting means.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S4 ', where the gaming state of the generated big bonus (1) is registered in the gaming state history table and the gaming state history table is updated. Specifically, the number of occurrences of the big bonus (1) that day (how many times) is specified by the number of BB1 in the updated game information table, and new state-specific data is additionally registered. Then, “BB1” and the number of times and the time at that time are registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the data of the total number of games, the total number of inserted medals, and the total number of paid-out medals are as follows: At that time, the total number of games stored in the game information table (today) (corresponding to the total number of games at that time), the total number of inserted medals (corresponding to the total number of inserted medals at that time), the total number of paid-out medals (that (Corresponding to the total number of paid-out medals at the time)), and as described above, the necessary data of the state-specific data immediately before the state-specific data is calculated and confirmed. To.

  In addition, for the item data of “unit” of the additionally registered big bonus (1) by state, the unit number specified in the one unit determination process of S33 described later is stored.

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of S5, and the number of elapsed games counted in the small role game counter is the number of overlapping winning determination games in the setting information, that is, the number of overlapping winning determination games in the overlapping winning related setting screen of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the number of duplicate winning determination games (for example, 5 games) based on the setting contents in the item.

  If it is not less than the number of overlapping winning determination games (for example, 5 games) in the determination, that is, if the number of elapsed games is, for example, 6 or more games, the generated big bonus (1) is awarded the single winning special prize. In step S9, the small game counter is reset (the number of elapsed games corresponding to all small roles is updated to “−”), and the number of bonus games is reset to “0” (S10). ), The process proceeds to step S33, and after the one-unit determination process shown in FIG. 39 is performed, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is within the number of duplicate winning determination games (for example, 5 games), it is determined “Yes” in the determination in the step S5, and the process proceeds to the step S6. A small winning combination such as a cherry is identified as a double winning small combination that is duplicated (simultaneous) with the generated big bonus (1), and the generated big bonus (1) is determined to be a double winning special prize (S6). ), And 1 is added to the number of times of winning of the double winning cherries of the cherries that are the selected winning small roles (S7), and the number of cherries that are the number of times of winning of the overlapping winning cherries and the big bonus (1) is- After adding 1 to the number of BB1 duplicate wins and updating (S8), the small role game counter is reset (the number of elapsed games corresponding to all small roles) ("-") (S9), the number of games between bonuses is reset to "0" (S10), the process proceeds to step S33, the unit determination process shown in FIG. To do.

  In other words, in the steps S5 and S6 of the present embodiment, the special winning occurrence specifying means of the present invention is used in the overlapping winning determination period until the small game counter counts 5 games as the predetermined number of games. The big bonus (1) whose occurrence is specified in the step is determined to be a duplicate winning special prize that is determined to be allowed to be generated at the same time as the specific general prize (for example, cherry) and out of the duplicate winning determination period. In the case where the number of games by the small role game counter is 6 games or more, the special prize identified in step S3 is determined to be a single prize special prize, and a duplicate prize special prize judgment is made in steps S5 and S6. Means are formed.

  In addition, in the steps S7 and S8 of the game state specifying process of the present embodiment, during the overlapping winning determination period until five games, which are a predetermined number of games, are counted by the small role game counter constituting the game number counting means. The number of occurrences of the big bonus (1) whose occurrence has been identified in step S3 of the gaming state identification process, that is, the special winning that has been determined to be the double winning special winning by the gaming state identifying process that is the duplicate winning special winning determining means. The number of duplicate winning special winnings, which is the number of occurrences, and the number of overlapping winning special winnings for each specific general winning type, that is, the number of overlapping winning cherry winnings in the game information table, the number of overlapping winning watermelon winnings, and the number of overlapping winning one prize It is the number of times that the small winning combination and the big bonus (1) are won, which is the number of times the number of times and the number of special winnings overlapped. Each of these counts is counted by adding 1 to the Jerry-BB1 overlapping winning count, the watermelon-BB1 overlapping winning count, and the one-sheet-BB1 overlapping winning count, and S7 and S8 of the gaming state specifying process. The control microcomputers (MPUs) 279 and 579 for performing the above steps constitute duplicate winning special prize number counting means and winning type special winning number specifying information counting means.

  Further, when the changed signal is the BB2 signal, it is determined as “No” in the step of S1, and then it is determined as “Yes” in the step of S11. Then, the process proceeds to the step of S12. It is determined whether the change has shifted from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state, that is, whether the input state of the BB2 signal after the change is the “ON” state.

  In the determination, if the change in the BB2 signal is not a change from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state, that is, if the input state of the BB2 signal after the change is in the “OFF” state, the process proceeds to step S27. On the other hand, if the input state of the BB2 signal after the change is “ON”, the process proceeds to step S13 and the special slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is accompanied by a transition to the big bonus (2). It is specified that the winning “white 7-white 7-red 7” has occurred.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S13 ′, and when the gaming state at that time, that is, the gaming state in which the big bonus (2) has occurred is the replay time (RT), the occurrence of the big bonus (2) is the replay time ( It is determined whether or not the termination condition of (RT) is not met.

  Specifically, based on the RT-related setting information, whether or not bonus signal determination is selected (checked) in the RT end determination of the replay time item on the RT-related setting screen is specified and selected (checked). If not, it is determined that the occurrence of the big bonus (2) does not correspond to the end condition of the replay time (RT), and if it is selected (checked), the occurrence of the big bonus (2) occurs. It is determined that the replay time (RT) end condition is met.

  If it is determined to be applicable, the process proceeds to step S13 ′ +, where it is determined that the replay time (RT) before the occurrence of the big bonus (2) has ended, and the digest game counter is initialized (reset). When the process proceeds to step S14, on the other hand, if it is determined not to be applicable, it is determined that the replay time (RT) before the occurrence of the big bonus (2) does not end, and the process passes through the step S13 '+. In other words, the process proceeds to step S14 while the digest game counter is not initialized (reset) and the number of digest games corresponding to the replay time (RT) is maintained. Note that the number of digest games held in this way is not subtracted and updated during the generated big bonus (2), and is thus held until the end of the big bonus (2).

  If the gaming state when the big bonus (2) occurs is the chance zone state, it is determined that the chance zone state has ended due to the occurrence of the big bonus (2), and the digest game counter is initialized. (Reset) and proceed to step S14.

  In step S14, the game state of today's data in the game state history table is updated to “BB2”, and 1 is added to the number of BB2 times of today's data.

  That is, in step S14 of the game state specifying process of the present embodiment, by adding 1 to the BB2 number forming the winning type special winning number specifying information, the BB2 number is totaled, and the gaming state specifying The control microcomputers (MPUs) 279 and 579 that execute step S14 of the process constitute a winning type special winning number specifying information counting unit.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S14 ', where the gaming state of the generated big bonus (2) is registered in the gaming state history table and the gaming state history table is updated. Specifically, the number of occurrences (the number of times) of the big bonus (2) that day is specified by the number of BB2 in the updated game information table, and new state-specific data is additionally registered. Then, “BB2” and its number of times and the time at that time are registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the data of the total number of games, the total number of inserted medals, and the total number of paid-out medals are as follows: At that time, the total number of games stored in the game information table (today) (corresponding to the total number of games at that time), the total number of inserted medals (corresponding to the total number of inserted medals at that time), the total number of paid-out medals (that (Corresponding to the total number of paid-out medals at the time)), and as described above, the necessary data of the state-specific data immediately before the state-specific data is calculated and confirmed. To.

  In addition, for the item data of “unit” of the additionally registered big bonus (2) by state, the unit number specified in the one-unit determination process of S33 described later is stored.

  Then, proceeding to the step of S15, the number of elapsed games counted in the small role game counter is the number of overlapping winning determination games in the setting information, that is, the number of overlapping winning determination games in the overlapping winning related setting screen of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the number of duplicate winning determination games (for example, 5 games) based on the setting contents in the item.

  If it is not less than the number of overlapping winning determination games (for example, 5 games) in the determination, that is, if the number of elapsed games is, for example, 6 or more games, the generated big bonus (2) is awarded the single winning special prize. In step S9, the small game counter is reset (the number of elapsed games corresponding to all small roles is updated to “−”), and the number of bonus games is reset to “0” (S10). ), The process proceeds to step S33, and after the one-unit determination process shown in FIG. 39 is performed, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is within the number of duplicate winning determination games (for example, 5 games), it is determined as “Yes” in the determination in step S15, and the process proceeds to step S16. A small winning combination, for example, a watermelon, is identified as a duplicate winning small combination that is duplicated (simultaneously elected) with the generated big bonus (2), and the generated big bonus (2) is determined to be a duplicate winning special prize (S16). ) In addition, 1 is added to and updated the number of duplicate winning watermelon winnings of the watermelon that is the double winning winning combination (S17), and the watermelon that is the number of overlapping winning times of the watermelon that is the winning double winning combination and the big bonus (1) After adding 1 to the BB2 overlapping winning count and updating (S18), the small role game counter is reset (the number of elapsed games corresponding to all small roles) ("-") (S9), the number of games between bonuses is reset to "0" (S10), the process proceeds to step S33, the unit determination process shown in FIG. To do.

  That is, in the steps S15 and S16 of the present embodiment, in the step of S13, which is a special winning occurrence specifying means, in the overlapping winning determination period until the predetermined game number of 5 games is counted by the small role game counter. The big bonus (2) whose occurrence is specified is determined to be a duplicate winning special prize that is determined to be allowed to be generated simultaneously with the specific general winning (for example, watermelon), and a small bonus that is outside the overlapping winning determination period. When the number of games counted by the game counter is 6 or more, the special prize determined to be generated in step S3 is determined as a single winning special prize, and the duplicated winning special prize judging means is formed by the steps in S15 and S16. Has been.

  In addition, in the steps S17 and S18 of the game state specifying process of the present embodiment, during the overlapping winning determination period until 5 games as a predetermined number of games are counted by the small role game counter constituting the game number counting means. The number of occurrences of the big bonus (2) whose occurrence has been identified in the step S13 of the gaming state identification process, that is, the special winning that has been determined to be the double winning special winning by the gaming state identifying process as the duplicate winning special winning determining means. The number of duplicate winning special winnings, which is the number of occurrences, and the number of overlapping winning special winnings for each specific general winning type, that is, the number of overlapping winning cherry winnings in the game information table, the number of overlapping winning watermelon winnings, and the number of overlapping winning one prize The number of times of winning a prize and the number of times of winning a prize for each type of special prize, the number of times that Cherry-BB2 is won, and the watermelon-BB A control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that implements the steps S17 and S18 of the gaming state specifying process by adding and updating 1 to the number of duplicate wins and 1-BB2 duplicate wins. 579 constitutes a duplicate winning special prize number counting means and a winning type special winning number specifying information counting means.

  Further, when the changed signal is an RB signal, it is determined as “No” in the step of S1 after it is determined as “No” in the step of S1, and the process proceeds to the step of S19. It is determined whether or not the BB2 signal is in the “ON” state. If the BB1 signal or the BB2 signal is in the “ON” state, the RB signal is output in the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2). If there is, the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when both the BB1 signal and the BB2 signal are in the “OFF” state, the process proceeds to step S20, in which whether the change of the RB signal is a change from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state, that is, It is determined whether or not the input state of the RB signal after the change is “ON”.

  In the determination, if the change in the RB signal is not a change from the “OFF” state to the “ON” state, that is, if the input state of the RB signal after the change is in the “OFF” state, the process proceeds to step S27. On the other hand, if the input state of the RB signal after the change is the “ON” state, the process proceeds to step S21, and the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is a special prize with a transition to the regular bonus. It is specified that “black BAR−black BAR−red 7” has occurred.

  Then, proceeding to the step of S21 ′, when the gaming state at that time, that is, the gaming state in which the regular bonus is generated is the replay time (RT), the occurrence of the regular bonus is the end condition for the replay time (RT). It is determined whether it is not applicable.

  Specifically, based on the RT-related setting information, whether or not bonus signal determination is selected (checked) in the RT end determination of the replay time item on the RT-related setting screen is specified and selected (checked). If not, it is determined that the occurrence of the regular bonus is not applicable to the replay time (RT) end condition, and if it is selected (checked), the occurrence of the regular bonus is the replay time (RT). It is determined that the end condition is met.

  If it is determined to be applicable, the process proceeds to step S21 '+, where it is determined that the replay time (RT) before the occurrence of the regular bonus has ended, the digest game counter is initialized (reset), and S22 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not applicable, it is determined that the replay time (RT) before the occurrence of the regular bonus does not end, and the digest game is not performed without passing through the step S21 ′ +. Without initializing (resetting) the counter, the process proceeds to step S22 while keeping the number of digested games corresponding to the replay time (RT) remaining. It should be noted that the number of digest games held in this way is not subtracted and updated during the regular bonus that has been generated, and is therefore held until the end of the regular bonus.

  If the game state when the regular bonus occurs is the chance zone state, it is determined that the chance zone state has ended due to the occurrence of the regular bonus, and the digest game counter is initialized (reset). Proceed to step S22.

  In step S22, the game state of today's data in the game state history table is updated to “RB”, and 1 is added to the number of RBs of today's data.

  That is, in step S22 of the gaming state specifying process of the present embodiment, by adding 1 to the number of RBs forming the winning type special winning number specifying information, the number of RBs is counted, and the gaming state specifying The control type microcomputer (MPU) 279 that executes step S22 of the process constitutes a winning type special winning number specifying information counting unit.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S22 ', in which the gaming state of the regular bonus that has occurred is registered in the gaming state history table and the gaming state history table is updated. Specifically, the number of occurrences of the regular bonus on that day (how many times) is specified by the number of RBs in the updated game information table, and new state-specific data is additionally registered, Register (store) “RB”, the number of times, and the time at that time as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and at that time as data of the total number of games, the total number of inserted medals, and the total number of paid-out medals The total number of games stored in the game information table (today) (corresponding to the total number of games at that time), the total number of inserted medals (corresponding to the total number of inserted medals at that time), the total number of paid-out medals (total at that time) (Corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out) are respectively registered (stored), and as described above, the necessary data of the state-specific data immediately before the state-specific data is calculated and determined.

  In addition, for the item data of “unit” in the additionally registered regular bonus state data, the unit number specified in the one unit determination process of S33 described later is stored.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S23, and the number of elapsed games counted in the small role game counter is the number of duplicate winning determination game number data in the setting information, that is, the number of overlapping winning determination games on the overlapping winning related setting screen in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the number of duplicate winning determination games (for example, 5 games) based on the setting contents in the item.

  If it is not within the number of duplicate winning determination games (for example, 5 games) in the determination, that is, if the number of elapsed games is, for example, 6 games or more, the generated regular bonus is determined as a single winning special prize. In step S9, the small game counter is reset (the number of elapsed games corresponding to all small roles is updated to “−”), and the number of games between bonuses is reset to “0” (S10). The process proceeds to step (1) and the unit determination process shown in FIG. 39 is performed, and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is within the number of duplicate winning determination games (for example, 5 games), it is determined as “Yes” in the determination in the step S23, and the process proceeds to the step S24. A small winning combination, for example, a single winning combination (1) to (3) is identified as a duplicate winning partial winning combination with the generated regular bonus (double winning simultaneously), and the generated regular bonus is determined as a double winning special prize (S24), 1 is added to the number of times of winning the single winning combination (1) to (3), which is the double winning winning combination, and updated (S25), and the single winning role of the overlapping winning winning combination (1) to (3) and the regular bonus, the number of duplicated winnings is 1 sheet-After adding and updating 1 to the RB overlapping winning number (S26), the small role game counter is reset (all The elapsed game number corresponding to the small role is updated to “-” (S9), the number of bonus games is reset to “0” (S10), and the process proceeds to step S33 to determine one unit shown in FIG. After performing the process, the process is terminated.

  In other words, in the steps S23 and S24 of the present embodiment, in the step of S21 serving as the special winning occurrence specifying means during the overlapping winning determination period until the predetermined game number 5 games is counted by the small role game counter. The regular bonus whose occurrence is specified is determined to be a duplicate winning special prize that is determined to be allowed to be generated at the same time as the specific general winning (for example, one winning combination (1) to (3)). When the number of games by the small role game counter out of the period is 6 or more, the special prize determined to be generated in the step S21 is determined as the single prize special prize, and the duplicate prize is obtained by the steps S23 and S24. Special winning determination means are formed.

  In addition, in the steps of S25 and S26 of the gaming state specifying process of the present embodiment, during the overlapping winning determination period until 5 games, which are a predetermined number of games, are counted by the small role game counter constituting the game number counting means, The number of occurrences of the regular bonus that has been identified in step S21 of the gaming state identification process, that is, the number of occurrences of the special winning that has been determined as the double winning special winning by the gaming state identifying process that is the duplicate winning special winning determining means. The number of duplicate winning special winnings, which is the number of overlapping winning special winnings for each specific general winning type, that is, the number of overlapping winning cherry winnings in the gaming information table, the number of overlapping winning watermelon winnings, , The number of double winning special winnings for each type of special winning, Cherry-RB double winning number, and watermelon-RB double A control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that counts each of these wins by adding 1 to the number of wins and 1-RB overlap wins and updates, and executes steps S25 and S26 of the gaming state specifying process, 579 constitutes a duplicate winning special winning times counting means and a winning type special winning times specifying information counting means.

  In addition, in each step of S3, S13, and S21 of the game state specifying process performed by the control microcomputers (MPU) 279 and 579 of the present embodiment, to the signal input units 278a to 278e (581a to 581e) serving as information input means. Based on the input of the BB1 signal, the BB1 signal, and the RB signal, which are special winning information of the game, "Red 7-" is a special prize of a plurality of types accompanied by a shift to a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), and a regular bonus. Of the “Red 7-Red 7”, “White 7-White 7-Red 7”, and “Black BAR-Black BAR-Red 7”, it is specified which special winning has occurred, and this gaming state specifying process A special winning occurrence specifying means is formed by a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that implements.

  Next, the processing after the step of S27 that is performed when the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal are changed from ON to OFF, that is, when the bonus is ended will be described.

  When the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal (except when the BB1 and BB2 signals are ON) are changed from ON to OFF, as described above, the change of these signals is performed in each step of S2, S12, and S20. Detected and proceeds to step S27, and processing after step S27 is performed.

  First, in step S27, based on the RT related setting information, it is determined whether or not the end of the bonus corresponds to a chance zone state or a replay time (RT) generation condition.

  Specifically, based on the RT related setting information, one of the selection items BB1, BB2, and RB is selected (checked) in the sub-item of the occurrence condition of the item “chance zone” on the RT related setting screen. And whether or not the bonus signal determination is selected (checked) in the RT transition determination of the replay time item on the RT-related setting screen, and if none is selected (checked), If it is determined that the end of the bonus is not applicable to the chance zone state or the replay time (RT) occurrence condition and one of them is selected (checked), the end of the bonus is the chance zone state or the replay time ( RT) is determined to be applicable.

  If it is determined in step S27 that this is the case, the process proceeds to step S31, and a chance zone (RT) generation process is performed.

  In this chance zone (RT) generation process, first, it is specified from the type of the changed signal whether the completed bonus is a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), or a regular bonus.

  If the selected item of the specified bonus type is selected (checked) as a chance zone occurrence condition, it is determined that a chance zone state has occurred, and the game state (current) in the game information table is changed to “chance”. At the same time, while adding 1 to the total number of CZs, if the selected item of the bonus type is selected (checked) as the replay time transition condition, it is determined that the replay time has occurred, and the game in the game information table The state (current) is changed to “RT” and 1 is added to the total number of RTs.

  Then, the specified number of games corresponding to the specified bonus type is specified, and when the occurrence of the chance zone state is determined, the specified number of specified games is set to the number of digested games corresponding to the chance zone of the digested game number counter. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), various RT rush rate data at that time are calculated, the display of the RT rush rate screen including the calculated RT rush rate data is started, and the occurrence of the replay time is started. If determined, the digest game number counter is set to the digest game number corresponding to the replay time.

  That is, in S31 of the game state specifying process, the RT that can specify the ratio of the total RT count (replay time transition count) to the total CZ count (chance zone occurrence count) counted in the game information table (counting means). RT number in BB-CZ, RT number in RB-CZ with respect to rush rate (replay time rush rate specifying information) and number of chance zone occurrences for each type of special winning combination (total of BB1 and BB2 times, RB count) The RT entry rate (BB) and the RT entry rate (RB), which are replay time entry rate specifying information capable of specifying the ratio of the number of replay time transitions), are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 266 constituting the display screen 261. Replay time rush rate specifying information display means by means of a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 and a liquid crystal display device 266 for executing the gaming state specifying process It is formed.

  When the occurrence of the chance zone state is determined, the number of occurrences (number of times) of the chance zone state for which the occurrence has been determined on that day is specified by the total number of CZs in the updated game information table. At the same time, new state-specific data is additionally registered, and “chance”, the number of times and the time at that time are registered (stored) as the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the total number of games, total inserted medals And the total number of paid-out medals, the total number of games stored in the game information table (today) (corresponding to the total number of games at that time) and the total number of inserted medals (the total number of inserted medals at that time) ) And the total number of paid-out medals (corresponding to the total number of paid-out medals at that time), respectively, and as described above, After determining to calculate the one required data from the previous state-specific data, the process proceeds to step S33 and the process ends.

  In addition, when the occurrence of the replay time is determined, the number of occurrences (the number of times) of that day of the replay time for which the occurrence has been determined is specified by the total number of RTs in the updated game information table, Newly register state-specific data, and register (store) “RT” and the number of times and the time at that time as the gaming state of the additionally registered state-specific data. As data of the total number of paid-out medals, the total number of games currently stored in the game information table (today) (corresponding to the total number of games at that time) and the total number of inserted medals (corresponding to the total number of inserted medals at that time) ) And the total number of paid-out medals (corresponding to the total number of paid-out medals at that time) are registered (stored), and as described above, the state immediately before the state-specific data After determining to calculate the necessary data of the data, the process proceeds to step S33 and the process ends.

  In addition, in the “unit” item of the additionally registered chance zone state or replay time state data, one unit of the bonus that has been completed is performed by performing the one unit determination process described later in step S33. The same unit number as the unit number of the bonus is stored.

  If it is determined in step S27 that the game is not applicable, the process proceeds to step S28, where it is determined whether or not there is a remaining game number in the number of digested games corresponding to the replay time of the digested game number counter. If the number exists, the process proceeds to step S32, and replay time continuation processing is performed.

  Specifically, in the replay time continuation process of S32, the game state after the bonus ends is determined as the replay time, and the game state (current) in the game information table is changed to “RT”. Since the replay time is a continuation of the replay time before the start of the bonus, it is not added to the total number of RTs.

  Then, as the number of occurrences of replay time, the number of “RT” stored in the data by state of the replay time before the occurrence of the finished bonus is specified, and the state-specific data is newly registered in the gaming state history table. As the game state of the additionally registered state-specific data, “RT” and the number of times specified above (the same as the number of replay times before the occurrence of the finished bonus) and the time at that time are registered (stored). As data of the number of games, the total number of inserted medals, and the total number of paid-out medals, the total number of games stored in the game information table (today) at that time (corresponding to the total number of games at that time), the total number of inserted medals (that (Corresponding to the total number of inserted medals at the time) and the total number of paid out medals (corresponding to the total number of paid out medals at that time). , As described above, after determining to calculate the necessary data of the previous states by the data of the state-specific data, the process proceeds to step S33 and the process ends.

  In addition, in the “unit” item of the additionally registered replay time state data, a unit of one unit before the bonus generation that has been completed is performed by performing a unit determination process described later in step S33. The same unit number as the number is stored, and the replay time before the bonus occurrence, the bonus, and the replay time after the bonus are included in one unit.

  If there is no remaining game number in the number of digested games corresponding to the replay time of the digested game number counter, it is determined “No” in step S28, and the process proceeds to step S29, where the gaming state ( After (current) is updated to “normal”, the newly generated normal gaming state is registered and the gaming state history table is updated.

  Specifically, the state-specific data is newly added and registered, and “normal” is registered (stored) as the gaming state of the additionally registered state-specific data, and the current time is registered (stored) as the time, As data of the total number of games, the total number of inserted medals, and the total number of paid-out medals, the total number of games (corresponding to the total number of games at that time) stored in the game information table (today), the total number of inserted medals ( (Corresponding to the total number of inserted medals at that time) and the total number of paid-out medals (corresponding to the total number of paid-out medals at that time) are registered (stored), respectively. After calculating and determining the necessary data for the state-specific data, that is, the state-specific data for the completed bonus, the process is terminated and the process proceeds to step S33 to execute the one-unit determination process. .

  Here, the one-unit determination process of the present embodiment performed in the step of S33 will be described below. In the one-unit determination process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the process follows the step of S10. In other words, it is determined whether or not the process is a process at the time of occurrence of the bonus. If the process is subsequent to the step of S10, the process after St2 is performed by proceeding to the step of St2, while the process of S10 If the process is not a process following the step, that is, if the process is at the end of the bonus, the process after St6 is performed by proceeding to the step of St6.

  In step St2, the gaming state before the bonus is generated is identified from the gaming state history table, and it is determined whether or not the identified gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  If the specified gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step St5, where the start of the generated bonus is determined as a new unit start, and in step S4 ′ (S14 ′, S22 ′). The unit number obtained by adding 1 to the largest number already stored as the unit number is registered (stored) in the item “unit” of the bonus state-specific data additionally registered in the gaming state history table, and the processing is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if the specified gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to steps St2 to St3, and it is determined whether or not the gaming state before the bonus occurrence is the chance zone state. Further, proceeding to the step of St4, based on the 1 unit related setting information, the presence or absence of the unit continuation setting of the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ”, that is, the“ unit continuation setting ”of the 1 unit related setting screen described above. It is determined whether or not “Yes” is selected (checked) in the item “”.

  If there is no unit continuation setting in this determination, that is, if “no” is selected (checked) in the “unit continuation setting” item, the process proceeds to step St5, and the start of the generated bonus is set to one new unit. The unit number is already stored in the “unit” item of the bonus state-specific data additionally registered in the gaming state history table in step S4 ′ (S14 ′, S22 ′). A unit number obtained by adding 1 to a large number is registered (stored), and the process is terminated. At this time, when “Termination Chance Zone Setting” is set to “Not Included” based on the one-unit related setting information, the “Unit” item data of the state-specific data of the previous chance zone state Is updated to “−”, so that the chance zone state is not included in one unit before one unit that is newly determined to start.

  Further, when it is determined that the state is not the chance zone state in the determination of St3, that is, when the game state is the replay time (RT), and in the item of “unit continuation setting” in the determination of St4, that is, “unit continuation setting” If "Yes" is selected (checked), the process proceeds to step St7, where unit continuation is determined, and the latest state-specific data additionally registered in the gaming state history table, that is, S4 '(S14', The same unit number as the unit number stored in the “unit” of the previous state data is stored in the “unit” item of the bonus state-specific data additionally registered in step S22 ′). However, in the case where the previous state-specific data is the chance zone state-specific data and the unit number is not stored in the “unit”, 1 is added to the largest number already stored as the unit number. The unit number is stored in the “unit” of the chance zone state data and the generated bonus state data, and the unit determination process is terminated.

  That is, in the one unit determination process in the game state specifying process of the present embodiment, the special winning combination occurrence information during the replay time (replay time state), that is, during one unit (one unit period) according to the setting. When a BB1 signal, a BB2 signal, and an RB signal are input, one unit (one unit period) is continued without ending, while a BB1 signal serving as special winning combination occurrence information during the chance zone state, When a BB2 signal or RB signal is input, one unit (one unit period) ends, and a big bonus (1) and big bonus specified from the BB1 signal, BB2 signal, and RB signal, which are special winning combination generation information (2) The period after the chance zone state associated with the occurrence of the regular bonus is defined as a new unit period, and the control state for executing the gaming state specifying process Con (MPU) 279,579 by one unit period specifying means is formed.

  Further, if “No” is determined in the step of St1, that is, if the process is at the end of the bonus, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state in the step of St6. If it is, it is determined that one unit is completed, and “-” is registered (stored) in the “unit” item of the state data of the normal gaming state additionally stored as the latest state data of the gaming state history table. Then, after it is made possible to specify that one unit has ended at the end of the gaming state of the bonus before entering the normal gaming state, the one-unit determining process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of St6 that it is not in the normal gaming state, that is, as described later, the end of the bonus is a chance zone state or a replay time (RT) transition (start) condition, If the gaming state is the chance zone state or the replay time (RT), the process proceeds to step St7, and as described above, it is determined that the unit is continued, and the latest registered additionally in the gaming state history table. State-specific data, that is, “unit” of the state-specific data of the chance zone state or the replay time (RT) additionally registered in the chance zone (RT) generation process of S31 or the replay time (RT) continuation process of S32. In the item, the unit number stored in the “unit” of the bonus state-specific data that is the previous state-specific data After the same unit number is registered (stored) so that the chance zone state or replay time (RT) can be specified as the same gaming unit as the previous bonus gaming state, the one unit determination The process ends.

  That is, in the present embodiment, by performing these one unit determination processes, one unit is determined as shown in FIG. 42 according to the model (type) and setting.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), if the model code is NNN0c and the chance zone state does not occur and only the replay time (RT) occurs, the normal gaming state When a big bonus (1) occurs in the game, it is determined that one unit starts, and after the one unit start determination is made, the period until the normal gaming state is reached for the first time, that is, through the replay time (RT) Various consecutive bonus periods and replay time (RT) periods are determined as one unit. Although not shown, depending on the model, there may be a case where the point in time when RT starts in the normal gaming state is determined as one unit start.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), a big bonus (1) is generated in the normal gaming state as long as the model code is ANN2d and the chance zone is generated but the loop due to re-entry is not generated. As a result, it is determined that one unit is started, and after the one unit start determination is made, the period until the normal gaming state is reached for the first time, that is, various continuous times through the replay time (RT) or the chance zone state. The bonus period and the replay time (RT) period are determined as one unit. Although not shown, depending on the model, there is a case where the start point of the chance zone state generated in the normal gaming state is determined as one unit start.

  However, these one unit is one unit determined when “Yes” is selected (checked) in the unit continuation setting on the one-unit related setting screen described above, and “No” is selected in the unit continuation setting ( When the big bonus (2) occurs during the chance zone state, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the big bonus (2) is generated (started), as shown in FIG. One unit before the occurrence and one unit after the occurrence are taken as one individual unit.

  Furthermore, when “not included” is selected (checked) in the end chance zone setting on the one-unit related setting screen described above, a big bonus (2) occurs as shown in FIG. When the chance zone state becomes the final chance zone state and corresponds to the chance zone state that does not shift to RT, it is determined that the chance zone state is not included in one unit before the occurrence of the big bonus (2), Based on this determination, the “unit” data of the state-specific data is registered (stored) so that the chance zone state is not included in one unit before the occurrence of the big bonus (2).

  In addition, if the model code is a model in which a chance zone occurs and a loop due to re-entry occurs, such as AAA1e, a big bonus (1) is generated in the normal gaming state as shown in FIG. As a result, it is determined that one unit is started, and after the one unit start determination is made, the period until the normal gaming state is reached for the first time, that is, various continuous times through the replay time (RT) or the chance zone state. The bonus period and the replay time (RT) period are determined as one unit. Although not shown, depending on the model, there is a case where the start point of the chance zone state generated in the normal gaming state is determined as one unit start.

  Further, when “not included” is selected (checked) in the end chance zone setting on the one-unit related setting screen described above, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), before the normal gaming state is entered again. One unit is determined so that the last chance zone state (chance zone state after BB2) is not included in one unit. Based on the determination, the chance zone state (chance zone state after BB2) is set to one unit. The “unit” data of the state-specific data is registered (stored) so as not to be included.

  However, these one unit is one unit determined when “Yes” is selected (checked) in the unit continuation setting on the one-unit related setting screen described above, and “No” is selected in the unit continuation setting ( In the case where a regular bonus (RB) is generated during the chance zone state, when the regular bonus (RB) is generated (started), as shown in FIG. One unit before the occurrence and one unit after the occurrence are taken as one individual unit.

  Furthermore, when “not included” is selected (checked) in the end chance zone setting on the one-unit related setting screen described above, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), before entering the normal gaming state again. One unit is determined so that the last chance zone state (chance zone state after BB2) is not included in one unit, and based on the determination, the state-specific data is set so that the chance zone state is not included in one unit. Since the “unit” data is registered (stored) and the chance zone state where the regular bonus (RB) occurs is also the terminal chance zone state, the chance zone state where the regular bonus (RB) occurs is 1 unit. The chance zone state in which one unit is determined not to be included and a regular bonus (RB) is generated based on the determination is So that it is not included in one unit of the previous generation of error bonus (RB), the data of "unit" of the state-specific data is registered (stored).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the end chance zone setting is also applied to the chance zone state that ends when a bonus is generated when “No” is selected (checked) in the unit continuation setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the end chance zone setting is not applied to the chance zone state where these bonuses are generated, and the chance zone state where these bonuses are generated is always included in one unit. Further, it may be possible to set on the one-unit related setting screen whether or not to apply the end chance zone setting to the chance zone state where these bonuses are generated.

  That is, in the one unit determination process of the present embodiment, the big bonus (1), which is a special winning combination, based on the signals input to the signal input units 278a to 278f (581a to 581f) serving as information input means, The period during which the big bonus (2) and the regular bonus are generated, and the period of the replay time (RT) state caused by the special bonus big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus Alternatively, one unit (one unit period) consisting of a special bonus combination Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), and a chance zone state and a replay time period caused by a regular bonus The 1-unit period specifying means is controlled by control microcomputers (MPU) 279 and 579 that execute the 1-unit determination process. It has been made.

  In this embodiment, the control microcomputers (MPUs) 279 and 579 serving as one unit period specifying means are based on the settings in the RT transition determination and the RT end determination in the RT related setting screen serving as the replay time period specifying information type setting means. The replay time state period (start, end) is specified by the replay time determination process, and the specified replay time state period is included in one unit (one unit period).

  Further, in this embodiment, the signal input is performed by performing the one unit determination process of the gaming state specifying process shown in FIG. 39, the replay time determination process shown in FIG. 34, and the chance zone determination process shown in FIG. 281a to 281f (581a to 581f) special winning combination occurrence information BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal as chance zone end identification information and replay time period information Based on the input and change of the BB1, BB2, and RB signals, "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7", "White 7-White 7-Red 7", "Black" The start of the chance zone state associated with the occurrence of “BAR-black BAR-red 7” and the end of the replay time (replay time state) in step Sr16 The start of the chance zone state by S, the start and end of the replay time state in the chance zone state at the steps Sr5 and Sr14, and the completion of the specified number of games, which is the non-transition end condition at the step Sz13, or the establishment of the winning of the falling role After the start of the chance zone state specified in step S31, with the occurrence of the special winning combination specified in steps S3, S13, and S21. For the first time, the period including the period until the end of the chance zone state due to the completion of the specified number of games, which is the non-transition end condition specified in the step of Sz13, or the establishment of the winning of the falling role is set as 1 unit (1 unit period). Chance zone determination process, replay time determination process, gaming state 1 unit period specifying means by a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 for implementing a constant process is formed.

  In the present embodiment, one unit (one unit period) includes one unit (1) of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, which are special game states that triggered the chance zone state. The number of loops, which is the number of occurrences of replay time that occurs in one unit (one unit period), whether or not included in the unit period) is the same. By including the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus that are in the gaming state in one unit (one unit period), one unit for counting the number of acquired difference medals and one unit for counting the number of loops However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bit is a special game state that has triggered the chance zone state. The special game state that triggered the occurrence of these chance zone states, with the start point of the chance zone state occurring at the end of bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus as the start of one unit (one unit period) These big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus may not be included in one unit (one unit period) for counting the number of occurrences of replay time.

  In other words, “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7”, “White 7-White 7-Red 7”, “Black BAR-Black BAR-Red 7” which are special winning combinations identified in the steps S3, S13, S21. The period from the start of the chance zone state due to the occurrence of the occurrence to the end of the chance zone state due to the completion of the prescribed number of games or the completion of the falling role winning, which is the non-transition end condition specified in the step of Sz13 for the first time after the start You may make it specify the period containing 1 as 1 unit (1 unit period).

  Next, the setting value estimation process shown in FIG. 37 performed after the gaming state specifying process shown in FIG. 36 will be described. First, game information setting data for setting value estimation in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276, That is, the estimation used to estimate the setting values of the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ by the setting data based on the setting contents in the setting value estimation game information setting item on the duplicate winning related setting screen of FIG. 27. Which game information the game information (evaluation information) is, specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 27, the BB1 probability, the BB2 probability, the RB probability, the cherry probability, and the single player probability are the estimation game information (Evaluation information) is specified (Ss1).

  Then, the BB1 probability, the BB2 probability, the RB probability, the cherry probability, and the one-piece winning probability, which are the game information for estimation (evaluation information) specified in Ss1, are extracted from the data of the game information table today, The number of BB2, the number of RBs, the number of cherries, and the number of winning combinations are calculated by dividing the number of times extracted by the value of the total number of games in the game information table (Ss2).

  Then, the respective probabilities calculated in Ss2 were calculated by collating with the respective probabilities (theoretical values) of the game information in the setting-specific winning probability data (file data, see FIG. 7) in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276. The set value with the closest probability is specified for each estimation game information (Ss3). At this time, when the probability calculated by the number of BB1, the number of BB2, and the number of RBs being “0” is “0”, the setting value of the estimation game information that is “0” is specified. It is not carried out and is excluded from the average target of Ss4 described later.

  And the setting value of today is estimated by rounding off the average value of the setting value specified in Ss3, and this estimated setting value is updated and stored as the estimated setting value of today's data in the game information table.

  Specifically, the setting value identified in Ss3 is, for example, the setting value with the closest probability (BB1 probability) based on the number of BB1 times is “4”, and the setting value with the closest probability (BB2 probability) based on the number of BB2 times is “5”, the setting value with the closest probability (RB probability) based on the number of RBs is “6”, and the setting value with the closest probability (cherry probability) based on the number of cherries is “5”. If the setting value with the closest probability (single winning probability) by “4” is “4”, the average of these values is calculated as 4.8, and “5” rounded off 4.8 is set as the setting value. presume.

  In other words, in the step of Ss3 in the set value estimation process of the present embodiment, the total number of games, the number of BB1, the number of BB2, the number of RBs, the number of cherry winnings, the number of one winning a prize, which are tabulated in the game information table serving as the evaluation information counting means. Each probability (BB1 probability, BB2 probability, RB probability, cherry probability, one-piece winning probability), which is evaluation information calculated based on the number of times, is stored in the winning probability data for each setting in the EEPROM 276 serving as setting specifying information storage means. The control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that estimates the set values of the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ on the basis of the respective winning probabilities that are the theoretical values of the evaluation information, and executes the step of Ss 3. The set value estimation means is formed by the above.

  Then, the display screen corresponding to the gaming state, for example, BB (2) stored in the gaming state of the gaming information table at that time, including the specified estimated setting value, specifically, FIG. 43 (c). As shown in the drawing, a display screen including “Big bonus 2 is occurring” and “Estimated set value is 5” is displayed on the display screen 261, and the display counter is set to 5 which is a predetermined number of games. The initial state is reset (Ss5).

  That is, in the step Ss5 in the setting value estimation process of the present embodiment, the setting value estimated in the step Ss3 serving as the setting value estimating means is displayed, and the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that executes the step Ss5 is displayed. In addition, an estimated set value display means is formed by the liquid crystal display device 266.

  The value of the display counter is updated by subtracting 1 when the small role game counter is updated in the above-described step of St4, and when the value of the display counter becomes 0, the estimated set value is 5 Is displayed.

  Next, proceeding to the step of Ss6, the estimated setting value of the day estimated in the step of Ss4 is compared with the estimated setting value of the previous day stored as the previous day data in the game information table, and the estimated setting value of the current day is It is determined whether it is larger than the estimated set value.

  That is, in the step Ss6 of the set value estimation process of the present embodiment, the current day set value estimated on the current day in the step Ss4 serving as the set value estimating means and the game information table serving as the previous day set value storage means are stored. The set value comparison means is formed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that executes the step of Ss6.

  If it is determined in this determination that the estimated setting value for today is larger than the estimated setting value for the previous day, the process proceeds to step Ss7, and the corresponding setting values for the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ exceed the previous day. The display is updated so that the display of “setting improvement table may” is always displayed at the two upper corner positions of the display screen 261 and the process is terminated, while the determination in the step of Ss6 If it is determined that the estimated setting value for today is not larger than the estimated setting value for the previous day, the process proceeds to step Ss8 to indicate that the setting values for the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ exceed the previous day. If the “setting improvement stand may” display is always displayed, the display is updated so that the display is erased, and the process ends.

  That is, in the step Ss7 of the set value estimation process, when the comparison result in the step Ss6 serving as the set value comparison means is a comparison result that the current day set value exceeds the previous day set value, the current day set value is “Setting improvement stand may be displayed” that exceeds the set value on the previous day is displayed, and a comparison result display means is formed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 and the liquid crystal display device 266 that perform the step of Ss7.

  Next, display contents displayed on the display screen 261 of the call lamp device 200 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The display screen 261 of the call lamp device 200 of this embodiment has a display screen shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45A, a normal screen including the base data of the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is normally displayed.

  The base data in the normal screen is displayed based on today's data aggregated in the game information table, and the total number of games of today's data is displayed in association with the display of “total number of games”. The BB1 count of today's data is displayed in association with the display of “BB (1) count”, the BB2 count of today's data is displayed in association with the display of “BB (2) count”, and the “RB count” display. The number of RBs of today's data is displayed in association with it, the number of games between bonuses of today's data is displayed in association with the display of “number of games between BB”, and in association with the display of “BB (1) probability”. A value obtained by dividing the number of BB1 times of today's data by the total number of games of today's data is displayed in a fractional format, and the number of BB2 times of today's data is the total number of games of today's data in association with the display of “BB (2) probability”. Dividing Value is displayed by the fraction format, so that the value obtained by dividing the RB number of today data on the total number of games today data in association with the display of "RB probability" is displayed on the fraction format.

  In the lower display area of the display screen 261, input menus of “next data”, “previous day”, “previous day”, and “call” are displayed at positions corresponding to the input buttons 255a to 255d, respectively. It has become so.

  In the input menu, when the input button 255d corresponding to the “call” menu is operated, the light bulb 267 is controlled to be turned on to notify the staff of the call.

  In addition, when the input button 255b corresponding to the “previous day” menu is operated in the input menu, or when the input button 255c corresponding to the “previous day” menu is operated, the previous day data in the game information table is displayed. In addition, table data (total number of games, number of BB (1) times, number of BB (2) times, number of RBs, BB (1) probability, BB (2) probability, RB probability) based on the previous day data is displayed.

  In addition, when the input button 255a corresponding to the “next data” menu is operated in the input menu, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), based on each data of the game information table, double winning (simultaneous winning) ) Table data 2 including each data regarding the data, and screen 3 data, including the data 4 screen including the graph indicating the occurrence status of one unit, and the table data 5 screen including the graph indicating the occurrence status of one unit according to the number of loops. The table data display process to be displayed is performed in the control microcomputer (MPU) 279, whereby the table data 2 screen, the table data 3 screen, the table data 4 screen, and the table data 5 screen are displayed.

  In the stand data 2 screen of the present embodiment, three items of “overlapping winning BB (1) number”, “overlapping winning BB (2) number”, “overlapping winning RB number” and a horizontal axis item are displayed as vertical axis items. As well as “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, “One piece role”, which is a double winning (simultaneous winning), “Independent” and “Total” items that are not redundant winning (simultaneous winning) are displayed. Corresponding data is displayed in a matrix composed of these display items.

  That is, at the position corresponding to “duplicate winning BB (1) number” and “cherry”, the cherry-BB1 overlapping winning number of the data of the day in the game information table is displayed, and “duplicate winning BB (1) number” is displayed. In the position corresponding to “Watermelon”, the number of times the watermelon-BB1 duplicated winnings of today's data in the game information table is displayed, and in the position corresponding to “Duplicated winning BB (1) number” and “One player” , 1 piece of today's data in the game information table-BB1 duplicated winning count is displayed, and the position corresponding to "duplicated winning BB (1)" and "single" is from the BB1 count of today's data in the gaming information table. The number obtained by subtracting the cherry-BB1 double win count, watermelon-BB1 double win count, and 1 sheet-BB1 double win count is displayed, and “double win BB (1) count” and “total” are displayed. The relevant position is displayed BB1 number today data in the gaming information table.

  Similarly, at the position corresponding to “duplicate winning BB (2) number” and “cherry”, the cherry-BB2 double winning number of the current day data in the game information table is displayed, and “duplicate winning BB (2) number” And “watermelon” are displayed in the game information table the number of times the watermelon-BB2 duplicated winnings of today's data are displayed, and the positions corresponding to “duplicated winning BB (2) times” and “single winning”. Is the number of today's data in the game information table-BB2 duplicated winning count, and the number of BB2 times of today's data in the gaming information table is in the position corresponding to "duplicated winning BB (2) times" and "single". The number obtained by subtracting Cherry-BB2 double win count, Watermelon-BB2 double win count, and 1 sheet-BB2 double win count is displayed, and “Duplicate Winner BB (2) Count” and “Total” The relevant position is displayed BB2 number today data in the gaming information table.

  Similarly, at the position corresponding to “duplicate win RB count” and “cherry”, the cherry-RB double win count of today's data in the game information table is displayed, and “duplicate win RB count” and “watermelon” are displayed. In the corresponding position, the number of watermelon-RB duplicated winnings of today's data in the game information table is displayed, and in the position corresponding to “duplicated winning RB times” and “one-player combination”, the data of today's data in the gaming information table is displayed. The number of 1-RB duplicated winnings is displayed, and the positions corresponding to “duplicated winning RBs” and “single” are the cherry-RB duplicated winnings and the watermelon-RBs duplicated from the RB times of the data of the day in the game information table. A numerical value obtained by subtracting the number of winning times and the number of 1-RB overlapping winnings is displayed, and a position in the game information table is displayed at a position corresponding to “overlapping winning RB times” and “total”. RB number of data is displayed.

  That is, in the stand data display processing of the present embodiment, the winning type special winning number specifying information totaled in the game information table constituting the winning type special winning number specifying information counting means of the present invention is BB1 number, BB2 number, Number of RBs, Cherry-BB1 double wins, Cherry-BB2 double wins, Cherry-RB double wins, Watermelon-BB1 double wins, Watermelon-BB2 double wins, Watermelon-RB double wins, 1-BB1 Duplicate winning count, 1-BB2 overlapping winning count, 1-RB overlapping winning winning count, cherry, watermelon, overlapping winning special winning count for each winning role, and overlapping for each special winning prize Number of winning special prizes (total of each small role-BB1 double winning number, total of each small role-BB2 double winning number, total of each small role-RB double winning number And the number of individual winning special prizes for each special prize (the number of times each small role -BB1 double winning number is subtracted from the number of BB1 times, the number of each small role -BB2 double winning number is subtracted from the number of BB2 times) The number of times and the number of RBs is the number obtained by subtracting the total of each small role-RB overlapping winning number, and the number corresponding to the display of “single”) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 266. The winning type special winning number display means is formed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 and the liquid crystal display device 266 that implement the above.

  And also in the lower display area of this table data 2 screen, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), “next data” and “previous day” are placed at the positions corresponding to the input buttons 255 a to 255 d respectively. "," 2 days before ", and" calling "input menus are displayed.

  Of these input menus, when the input button 255b corresponding to the “previous day” menu is operated, or when the input button 255c corresponding to the “previous day” menu is operated, the previous day data in the game information table and The table data 2 screen based on the previous day data, that is, various data related to the overlapping winning (simultaneous winning) is displayed in the same manner as the table data 2 screen based on the data for today.

  When the input button 255a corresponding to the “next data” menu among the input menus on the table data 2 screen is operated, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), each small item on the table data 2 screen is displayed. Corresponding to the display of the various overlapping winning numbers corresponding to the combination, a table data 3 screen is displayed in which the total winning number of the small combination is displayed in the denominator form.

  As the denominator of the position corresponding to “duplicate winning BB (1) times” and “cherry” on the table data 3 screen, the number of times of winning cherry in the game data table is displayed, and “duplicate winning BB (1)” is displayed. As the denominator of the position corresponding to “number of times” and “watermelon”, the number of watermelon winnings of the data of the day in the game information table is displayed, and the position corresponding to “duplicate winning BB (1) number of times” and “single winning” As the denominator, the number of times of winning one piece of today's data in the game information table is displayed.

  Similarly, as the denominator of the position corresponding to “duplicate winning BB (2) times” and “cherry”, the number of cherry wins of today's data in the game information table is displayed, and “duplicate winning BB (2) times” As the denominator of the position corresponding to “Watermelon”, the number of watermelon winnings of the data in the game information table for today is displayed, and as the denominator of the position corresponding to “Duplicate winning BB (2) number” and “One player” Displays the number of times of winning one piece of data for today in the game information table.

  Similarly, as the denominator of the position corresponding to “duplicated winning RB count” and “cherry”, the number of times of winning the cherry in the game data table for today is displayed, and it corresponds to “duplicated winning RB count” and “watermelon” As the denominator of the current position in the game information table, the number of watermelon winnings in the game information table is displayed, and as the denominator of the position corresponding to “duplicated winning RB count” and “single winning”, The number of times of winning one sheet is displayed.

  That is, in the table data display processing that constitutes the winning type special winning number display means of the present embodiment, the “double winning BB (1) number”, “double winning BB (2) serving as the winning type special winning number specifying information of the present invention. ) Number of times "," Duplicate winning RB count "and the number of duplicate winning special winnings at positions corresponding to each small role display, as well as the number of cherry winnings and watermelon winnings counted in the game information table constituting the specific general winnings counting means The number of times and the number of winning a prize are displayed.

  Further, when the input button 255a corresponding to the “next data” menu among the input menus on the table 3 data screen is operated, as shown in FIG. 46A, the corresponding slot machines 1, 1 ′, The unit data 4 screen showing the time series occurrence status of one unit generated in 1 ″ is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), this table data 4 screen is provided with a graph in which the horizontal axis is the time axis from 9 o'clock to 16 o'clock in the upper row and from 16:00 to 23:00 in the lower row. On the graph, each unit registered in today's data of the gaming state history table, that is, a band indicating one unit consisting of consecutive gaming states in which the same unit number is stored in the item “unit” The “time” data of the gaming state at the start of each unit is displayed at a position on the corresponding time axis, and the unit-acquired medal count in each unit ( Unit TY) and the number of loops that are the number of replay times that have occurred in the one unit are displayed in an overlapping manner.

  In this embodiment, all one unit stored in the gaming state history table is displayed. However, depending on the size of the display screen or the like, if all these one units are displayed, the graph becomes difficult to see. In such a case, only one unit of which the number of loops is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) among these one units may be displayed.

  These unit-acquired medal counts (unit TY) for each unit are the status-specific data in which the same unit number is stored in “unit” among the status-specific data registered in today's data in the gaming status history table. By summing the “number of medals”, the number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) for each unit is calculated, and the total number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) for each unit calculated is the number of units. By dividing by, the average number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) is calculated, and the calculated average number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) is displayed at the lower position of the graph of the base data 4 screen. Note that the average unit medal number (unit TY) calculated in this way is stored as one unit average TY in the game information table.

  That is, in the stand data display process of the present embodiment, the number of medal earned medals (1 unit period difference number specifying information that can specify the number of differences in one unit period counted in the gaming state history table as the counting means) A table data 4 screen including unit TY) and unit TY average is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 266 forming the display screen 261, and a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 for performing the table data display processing and the liquid crystal display The device 266 forms 1 unit period difference number specific information display means.

  In addition, the number of loops for each unit is to count the number of state-specific data in which replay times of different numbers are stored in the gaming state for the state-specific data in which the same unit number is stored in “unit”. The unit loop count average is calculated by dividing the total of the loop counts of each unit by the number of one unit, and the calculated unit loop count average is calculated on the graph of the base data 4 screen. Display at the bottom position. The unit loop number average calculated in this way is stored as one unit average RT number in the game information table.

  In other words, in the unit data display process of the present embodiment, the same unit number is stored in the “unit” item of the state-specific data in the gaming state history table in the one unit determination process serving as one unit period specifying means. The control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that counts and counts the number of occurrences of replay time (replay time state) that occur within one unit (one unit period) specified by the computer, and performs the unit data display processing In addition, a counting means is formed by the game state history table.

  Further, in the table data display process of the present embodiment, the loop count (replay time occurrence count specifying information that can specify the number of occurrences of the replay time (replay time state) in one unit (one unit period) is added. The unit data four screens including the unit RT number) and the unit loop average (unit RT number average) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 266 forming the display screen 261, and the control microcomputer (MPU) for executing the unit data display processing 279 and the liquid crystal display device 266 form replay time occurrence number specifying information display means.

  In this embodiment, each 1-unit display displayed on the base data 4 screen is selectable on the screen, and the player wants to grasp the contents of the gaming state generated in 1 unit. In FIG. 46C, a detailed screen shown in FIG. 46C is displayed in which a desired unit is selected on the screen so that the occurrence contents of each gaming state included in the selected unit can be grasped.

  The detailed screen of this embodiment identifies a unit number corresponding to one unit selected by the player, and the “gaming state” of each state-specific data in which the identified unit number is stored in the item “unit”. And “time” are specified, and a band display of a mode corresponding to the specified gaming state is performed at a position corresponding to the specified time on the expanded time axis.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), Big Bonus 1 is displayed in black bars, Big Bonus 2 is displayed in red (horizontal stripes in the drawing), and Regular Bonus is yellow (inclined to the right in the drawing). The striped pattern is displayed in a bar shape, the replay time is displayed in pink (left inclined striped pattern in the drawing), and the chance zone state is displayed in blue (dotted in the drawing).

  That is, in the table data display process of the present embodiment, one unit (one unit period) based on the state-specific data (occurrence state specifying information) stored in the gaming state history table serving as the occurrence state specifying information storage means. The chance zone state, the replay time (replay time state), and the occurrence status of various bonuses (special winning combination) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 266 forming the display screen 261 in a manner that can be specified. Occurrence status display means is formed by a control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that performs data display processing and a liquid crystal display device 266.

  Further, at the right side of the detailed screen, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) and the average number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) for one displayed unit, loop The unit RT number corresponding to the number, the average unit RT number, and the unit bonus number and the unit bonus number average that are the total of the number of bonuses (BB1, BB2, RB) included in one displayed unit are displayed. Is done. The average unit bonus times is calculated by dividing the total of the BB1 times, BB2 times, and RB times by the number of one unit.

  In order to close the detail screen of FIG. 46C, the input button 255a corresponding to the display of “return” at the bottom of the screen may be operated.

  Also, in the lower display area of the base data 4 screen, as shown in FIG. 46A, “next data” and “previous day” are placed at positions corresponding to the input buttons 255a to 255d, respectively, as in the case of each base data screen. ”,“ Previous Day ”, and“ Call ”input menus are displayed. Of these input menus, when the input button 255b corresponding to the“ Previous Day ”menu is operated, When the input button 255c corresponding to the menu of "second day" is operated, the previous day data of the gaming state history table and the four base data screens based on the previous day data, that is, the time series occurrence status graph of one unit are displayed. The

  Further, when the input button 255a corresponding to the “next data” menu among the input menus on the table data 4 screen is operated, as shown in FIG. 46B, each unit RT number (loop number) is classified. 5 screens of table data including an occurrence distribution graph of one unit are displayed.

  This table data 5 screen is a replay of numbers with different numbers depending on the game state with respect to the data by state in which the same unit number is stored in “unit” among the data by state stored in the data of today in the gaming state history table. By counting the number of state-specific data in which time is stored, the number of unit RTs for each unit is totaled, and the number of unit RTs whose unit RT number is “0” and the unit RT number is “1”. The number of 1 unit corresponding to each unit RT number is aggregated into a bar graph, such as the number of 1 unit, the number of 1 unit whose unit RT number is “2”, and so on.

  In other words, the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of this embodiment identifies each unit as one unit by storing the same unit number in the gaming state history table by one unit determination process serving as one unit period specifying unit. For the unit period, the number of pieces of data according to the state in which the replay times of different numbers that are the number of occurrences of the replay time state are stored is counted and totaled by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 and the gaming state history table. Means are formed.

  Further, in the table data display process of the present embodiment, the number of one unit (one unit period) corresponding to the total number of occurrences of the total replay time is totaled, and the control microcomputer for executing the table data display process (MPU) 279 forms one unit period number counting means for each loop number.

  Further, in the table data display process of the present embodiment, table data serving as one unit period number specifying information for each loop number that can specify the number of one unit (one unit period) corresponding to the number of occurrences of the total replay time. 5 screens are generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 266 that constitutes the display screen 261. The control microcomputer (MPU) 279 and the liquid crystal display device 266 for executing the display data display processing specify one unit period number for each loop number. Information display means is formed.

  When the input button 255a corresponding to the “next data” menu in the input menu on the table data 5 screen is operated, the screen returns to the table data screen shown in FIG.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a change in the display content of the display screen 261 in accordance with a change in the gaming state. For example, during the display of the table data screen shown in FIG. When the big bonus (1) occurs at “1”, as described above, the display of “Big bonus 1 is occurring” and “estimated set value is 5” are displayed in FIG. A display screen is displayed on the display screen 261.

  Then, if the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ is a model (type) in which the chance zone state is generated by the end of the big bonus (1), the start of the chance zone state as described above. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), an RT rush rate screen including various RT rush rate data at that time is automatically displayed, and the player is in a chance zone state occurring at that time. However, it becomes possible to easily grasp the rush rate at which the player enters the replay time while playing the game, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In this embodiment, these RT rush rate screens are displayed by the occurrence of the chance zone state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these RT rush rate screens are displayed on the data screens of each vehicle. Similarly to the above, it may be displayed on the display screen 261 in accordance with the player's operation.

  Next, processing executed in the collection unit 50 according to the present embodiment will be described. Processing executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 of the collection unit 50 includes processing related to display of the display screen 261 in the calling lamp device 200 and calling. The only difference is that there is no lamp (running lighting or the like) lighting process or the like, which is basically the same as the above-described processes performed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 in the calling lamp device 200.

  That is, the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 of the collection unit 50 also has four individual tasks assigned to each port for the interrupt monitoring process shown in FIG. 30 in the same manner as the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 in the calling lamp device 200. , The interrupt monitoring process for each of the four ports from the first port 581 to the fourth port 584, and each of the above-described SK6 to SK17, which is performed in association with the interrupt monitoring process. Processing can be performed independently. However, since the collection unit 50 does not have a display mechanism unlike the calling lamp device 200, the collection value estimation process of the SK 14, which is a process related to display, is not performed.

  Specifically, in the connected slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, whereby the medal IN signal is sent to the signal input units 581d to 581d of the ports 581 to 584. If it is input to 584d, the input of the medal IN signal is detected in the step SK1, and SK6 insertion-related processing shown in FIG. 31, SK7 digest game number counter update processing, SK8 bonus signal determination, SK9 The latest game table update process shown in FIG. 32, the replay time determination process shown in FIG. 34 of SK10, and the chance zone determination process shown in FIG. 35 of SK11 are executed.

  Note that the steps Sr8 and Sr19 in the replay time determination process in FIG. 34 and the steps Sz9 and Sz18 in the chance zone determination process shown in FIG. 35 are processes related to display, and therefore the replay performed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 is performed. It has been deleted from the time determination process and the chance zone determination process.

  In the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, when the game is over and the medal OUT signal is input to the signal input units 581e to 584e of the ports 581 to 584, the medal OUT signal is input. Is detected in the step SK2, and each process of SK8 to SK11 is performed together with the payout related process shown in FIG. 33 of SK14.

  Note that the payout related process executed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 is executed with the payout related process including the steps Sh1 to Sh6, and the processes of Sh7 to Sh10 that are processes related to the display are deleted.

  Further, when there is a change in the BB1, BB2, and RB signals input to the ports 581 to 584, the change in the signal is detected in the step SK3, and each of S1 to S33 shown in FIG. A game state specifying process including steps is performed.

  In addition, when the replay signal is input to the signal input units 581f to 584f of the respective ports 581 to 584 in response to the occurrence of the replay in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, the replay signal Is detected in the step SK4 and the step SK15 is performed, whereby the “replay” data of the latest game corresponding to the machine number connected to each port in the latest game table is updated.

  Further, when a setting change signal is input to the signal input units 581g to 584g of the respective ports 581 to 584 in response to the setting changing operation being performed in the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″. When the input of the setting change signal is detected in the step SK5 and the steps SK16 and SK17 are performed, the state-specific data corresponding to the machine number connected to each port in the gaming state history table is updated. The

  As described above, the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 of the collection unit 50 converts the above-described processing for each port into setting information corresponding to the serial number connected to each port, RT related setting information, and one unit continuous setting information. The game information stored in the game information table corresponding to the machine number of the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ connected to each port, and the game corresponding to the machine number By updating the state-specific data (game state history) stored in the state history table, the game information of today's data in the game information table in the calling lamp device 200 and the game state history of today's data in the game state history table The same data is stored and managed in the game information table and game state history table of the collection unit 50 as shown in FIGS. That.

  Each game information stored in and managed in the game information table and the game state history table of these collection units 50 and the game state history (data for each state) are stored in the table game shown in FIG. Information information (transmission data string 1) and game state history data (transmission data string 2) are transmitted to the hall computer 140, and each game information of the corresponding machine number in the game information table is received today in response to reception of the game information data. Is updated, and update is performed by additionally registering the game number in the table-specific gaming state history table (today) in response to the reception of the gaming state history data.

  Each game information managed in the game information table of the hall computer 140 in this way is subjected to a predetermined display operation in the hall computer 140. Specifically, the slot machine for which the base data is to be displayed. By executing the designation operation of the 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ unit numbers, each game information stored in the game information table today and stored in the individual game state history table in association with the specified unit number. Each game state history information is displayed on the game information screen 1 shown in FIG. 47 and the game information screen 2 shown in FIG. 48 when the game information display process is executed in the CPU 142. The

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the game information screen 1 according to the present embodiment, the total number of inserted medals, the total number of paid-out medals, and the number of difference medals, which are the game information managed in the game information table today. The total number of games, the number of games between bonuses, the number of occurrences of BB (1), the number of cherry-BB (1) duplicated wins, the number of watermelon-BB (1) the number of duplicated wins, and the number of one-BB (1) Duplicate win count, BB (2) occurrence count, Cherry-BB (2) duplicate win count, Watermelon-BB (2) duplicate win count, 1-BB (2) duplicate win count, RB occurrence count Cherry-RB double winning count, Watermelon-RB double winning count, Single-RB double winning count, Cherry winning count, Double winning Cherry winning count, Watermelon winning count, Duplicated winning watermelon winning count, 1 win and 1 win Number of wins, total replay time (RT), total chance zone (CZ), RT in BB-CZ, RT in RB-CZ, 1 unit average TY, 1 unit average RT In addition to the number of games between bonuses, cherry-BB (1) duplicate winning expectation, cherry-BB (2) duplicate winning expectation, cherry-RB overlapping winning expectation, watermelon-BB (1 ) Duplicate Winning Expectation, Watermelon-BB (2) Duplicate Winning Expectation, Watermelon-RB Duplicate Winning Expectation, 1 Sheet-BB (1) Duplicate Winning Expectation, 1 Sheet-BB (2) Duplicate Winning Expectation, 1 The sheet-RB overlapping winning expectation degree is calculated and displayed as a list in the same manner as in the calling lamp device 200.

  Further, in the hall computer 140 of this embodiment, the number of BB1, the number of BB2, the number of RBs, the total number of RTs, the total number of CZs, the number of RTs in BB-CZ, RB- Based on the number of RTs in the CZ, the RT rush rate (BB), RT rush rate (RB), RT rush rate (other than BB, RB), and total RT rush rate are calculated in the same manner as the call lamp device 200, Displayed in the lower right position.

  That is, in the game information display processing according to the present embodiment, the ratio of the total RT count (replay time transition count) to the total CZ count (chance zone occurrence count) counted in the game information table (counting means) today. RT entry rate (replay time entry rate specifying information) that can be specified, and the number of chance zone occurrences for each type of special winning combination (the sum of the number of BB1 and BB2, the number of RB), the number of RTs in BB-CZ, RB- The RT entry rate (BB) and the RT entry rate (RB), which are replay time entry rate specifying information capable of specifying the ratio of the number of RTs during CZ (replay time transition number), are displayed on the display device 147. A replay time rush rate specifying information display means is formed by the CPU 142 and the display device 147 for performing another game information display process.

  Further, in the game information screen 2 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the occurrence status of one unit is shown at the upper position of the screen, similar to the four screen data displayed on the calling lamp device 200. A graph is displayed, and at the bottom of the screen, a graph showing the occurrence status of one unit for each number of loops, similar to the table data 5 screen displayed on the call lamp device 200, is displayed in the table-specific gaming state history table (today ) Is generated and displayed based on the game state history (data by state) stored in correspondence with the machine number.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the unit state occurrence graph at the upper position of the screen is the same as the above-mentioned table data 4 screen, and the upper time is from 9:00 to 16:00, and the lower time is from 16:00 to 23:00. A graph whose axis is the horizontal axis is provided, and registered in the game state history (data by state) stored in correspondence with the unit number in the table-specific game state history table (today) on the graph Each band unit, that is, a band display indicating one unit composed of consecutive gaming states in which the same unit number is stored in the “unit” item, is the “time” of the gaming state starting from each unit. The data is displayed at the corresponding position on the time axis, and on the band display indicating each unit, the number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) in the unit and the replay time generated in the unit. Loop times There has been top heavy display.

  The unit-acquired medal count (unit TY) for each unit is the same unit number as the “unit” among the state-specific data stored in correspondence with the unit number in the table-specific gaming state history table (today). Is added to calculate the number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) for each unit, and the calculated unit acquired medals for each unit (unit: TY). By dividing the total of (TY) by the number of one unit, the average number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) is calculated, and the calculated average number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) is Display in position. Note that the average unit medal number (unit TY) calculated in this way is stored as the one-unit average TY in the game information table today.

  That is, in the unit-specific game information display process of the present embodiment, a unit that becomes one-unit period difference number specifying information that can specify the number of differences in one unit period totaled in the table-specific game state history table that is a totaling means. A table-specific game information screen 2 including the number of acquired medals (unit TY) and the unit TY average is generated and displayed on the display device 147. The CPU 142 and the display device 147 execute the table-specific game information display processing. Unit period difference number specifying information display means is formed.

  In addition, the number of loops for each unit is to count the number of state-specific data in which replay times of different numbers are stored in the gaming state for the state-specific data in which the same unit number is stored in “unit”. The unit loop count average is calculated by dividing the total loop count of each unit by the number of one unit, and the calculated unit loop count average is calculated on the right side of the occurrence status graph. Display in position. The unit loop number average calculated in this way is stored as one unit average RT number in the game information table today.

  That is, in the game information display process according to the present embodiment, the “unit” of the state-specific data in the game state history table is determined by the one-unit determination process performed by the collection unit 50 serving as the one-unit period specifying unit. The number of occurrences of replay time (replay time state) that occurred within one unit (one unit period) specified by storing the same unit number is counted and counted. Aggregating means is formed by the CPU 142 that executes the separate game information display process and the individual game state history table.

  Furthermore, in the game information display process according to the present embodiment, a loop that is replay time occurrence number specifying information that can specify the number of occurrences of the replay time (replay time state) in the one unit (one unit period) that has been aggregated. The table-specific game information screen 2 including the number of times (unit RT number) and the unit loop average (unit RT number average) is displayed on the display device 147, and the CPU 142 and the display device 147 for executing the table-specific game information display processing. Thus, a replay time occurrence number specifying information display means is formed.

  In addition, also in the game information screen 2 according to the present embodiment, each 1-unit display displayed in the 1-unit occurrence status graph can be selected by a pointer or the like on the screen. When it is desired to grasp the contents of the gaming state generated in one unit, it is possible to grasp the contents of occurrence of each gaming state included in the selected one unit by selecting the desired one unit with a pointer or the like on the screen. The detailed window shown in FIG. 48 is displayed.

  The detailed window of this embodiment specifies a unit number corresponding to one unit selected by the operator, and the “gaming state” of each state-specific data in which the specified unit number is stored in the item “unit”. And “time” are specified, and a band display of a mode corresponding to the specified gaming state is performed at a position corresponding to the specified time on the expanded time axis.

  It should be noted that the display state of each gaming state displayed in this detail window is the same as that of the detail screen in the calling lamp device 200. As shown in FIG. Included in one unit displayed, the number of medal earned medals (unit TY) and the number of medal earned medals (unit TY), the unit RT times corresponding to the number of loops and the unit RT number average The number of unit bonuses (BB1, BB2, RB) and the average number of unit bonuses are displayed. The average unit bonus times is calculated by dividing the total of the BB1 times, BB2 times, and RB times by the number of one unit. In order to close the displayed detail window, “Close” display at the top of the screen may be selected.

  In other words, in the game information display processing according to the present embodiment, one unit (based on the state-specific data (occurrence status specifying information) stored in the table-specific game state history table serving as the occurrence status specifying information storage means) The status of occurrence of a chance zone state, replay time (replay time state) and various bonuses (special winning combination) generated during one unit period) is displayed on the display device 147 in an identifiable manner. Occurrence status display means is formed by the CPU 142 and the display device 147 that perform information display processing.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the occurrence distribution graph of one unit for each unit RT number (loop number) at the lower position of the screen is the same as the above-mentioned table data 5 screen, and is stored in the table-specific gaming state history table. By counting the number of state-specific data in which a different number of replay times are stored in the gaming state for each state-specific data in which the same unit number is stored in the “unit”, The number of unit RTs per unit is totaled, the number of one unit with unit RT number “0”, the number of one unit with unit RT number “1”, and one unit with unit RT number “2” The number of 1 unit corresponding to the number of times of each unit RT is aggregated to form a bar graph.

  That is, the CPU 142 according to the present embodiment, for each unit period specified as one unit by storing the same unit number in the unit-based gaming state history table by one unit determination process serving as one unit period specifying means. The number of pieces of state-specific data in which different numbers of replay times that are the number of occurrences of the replay time state are stored is counted and summed, and the CPU 142 and the individual game state history table form a summing means. .

  Moreover, in the game information display process according to the present embodiment, the number of one unit (one unit period) corresponding to the number of occurrences of the total replay time is totaled, and the base data display process is performed. The CPU 142 forms one unit period number counting means for each loop count.

  In the game information display process according to the present embodiment, the number of 1 unit period by loop number that can specify the number of 1 unit (1 unit period) corresponding to the number of occurrences of the total replay time is obtained. A table-specific game information screen 2 is generated and displayed on the display device 147, and the CPU 142 and the display device 147 for executing the table-specific game information display processing form a unit period number specific information display means for each loop number. ing.

  The table-specific game information screen 1 and the table-specific game information screen 2 are not limited to today's data, but the previous day game information table, the previous day game information table, the table-specific game state history table (previous day), and the table-specific game state. Based on the history table (2 days before), the game information screen 1 and the game information screen 2 of the previous day and the previous day can also be displayed on the hall computer 140.

  Next, a gaming system according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The feature of the second embodiment is that the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the first embodiment are slot machines that do not perform the winning output of each of the small roles. Whereas the slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment is specified by the number of pulses of the OUT signal, a signal output corresponding to the generated small combination is made when each small combination is won. Thus, in the call lamp device 200 according to the first embodiment, each game information obtained by counting the duplicate winning expectation degree in the game information table can be specified by the signal output corresponding to each of these small roles. On the other hand, in the calling lamp device 200 ′ of the second embodiment, it is displayed using the duplicate winning expectation degree stored in the duplicate win expectation degree data (see FIG. 56) in advance. Since other system configurations are the same as those of the gaming system of the first embodiment, description of the same parts is omitted, and this is a change from the first embodiment. The characteristic part of the second embodiment will be described below.

  First, the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ used in the second embodiment will be described. The configuration of the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ in the second embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment. Although it is substantially the same as “1”, the difference is that the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the first embodiment is a slot in which a single combination (1) to (3) is generated as a small combination. In contrast to the machine, the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment have these one-piece roles (1) to (3) as the generated small roles as shown in the winning combination table of FIG. ), A slot machine in which a chance combination “orange-orange-orange” is generated in which no medal payout occurs.

  That is, as the role in the slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the special bonus is the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus as the small roles. Cherry, watermelon, chance role, and bell are replayed as a re-playing role. Also, as a combination of roles in slot machines 01, 01 ', 01 ", a big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Regular Bonus + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Regular Bonus + Watermelon, Big Bonus (1) + Chance, Big Bonus (2) + Chance, Regular Bonus + chance role is defined. That is, the total number of combinations of combinations and combinations is 16.

  The chance combination is awarded when the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and the normal gaming state, RT and chance zone state (models that generate the chance zone state) Only), medals are not paid out, but in the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out in the same manner as the one-piece combination of the first embodiment.

  Next, the internal lottery in the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment will be briefly described. Reference to each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the gaming state in the internal lottery is shown in FIG. It is performed in the order of the role numbers registered in the winning combination table shown.The game state is the normal game state, the RT or the chance zone state, and no special role is carried over, that is, "0" as the state number , “1” or “5” is set, the winning combination table is referred to, and the combinations of the combination of combination numbers 0 to 16 are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  Also, when the gaming state is a normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state, and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “2”, “3” or “6” In this case, the winning combination table is referred to, and the combinations of combinations of the combination numbers 12 to 16 and combinations of combinations are sequentially read out as target combinations for internal lottery.

  Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, when the state number is set to “4”, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of combinations of the combination numbers 13 to 16 are sequentially set as internal lottery target combinations. Read out.

  Then, in the internal lottery, as in the first embodiment, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of the combination to be the internal lottery and the state number indicating the current gaming state is sequentially added to the random number for the internal lottery. When the result of addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination or combination of winning combinations has been won.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a winning probability of a combination of a combination and a combination for each set value when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the RT, or the chance zone state.

  In this embodiment, when no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT or chance zone state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Regular Bonus + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (2) + Watermelon, Regular Bonus + Watermelon, Big Bonus (1) + Chance, Big Bonus (2) + Chance Roles, Regular Bonus + Chance Role, Replay, Cherry, Watermelon, Chance Role, Bell are subject to internal lottery, and the approximate winning probability of each of these roles and combinations of roles is as shown in FIG. It is almost the same as the case.

  Further, as a feature point of the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the external output board 110 of the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ In addition to the same BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal (only slot machine 01 ', 01 "), setting change signal (only slot machine 01"), cherry signal, watermelon signal The chance signal is output to the outside, and the cherry signal, the watermelon signal, and the chance signal are input to the calling lamp device 200 ′ and the collecting unit 50 via the signal cable 59.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the cherry signal, the watermelon signal, and the chance signal are displayed on the see-through window 3 as three consecutive symbols in the slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″, and the game is finished. When a cherry is won by the derived display result, a cherry signal with a predetermined pulse width is output. When a watermelon is won by the derived display result, a watermelon signal with a predetermined pulse width is output. When a chance combination is won based on the display result derived and displayed, a chance combination signal having a predetermined pulse width is output, and any small combination corresponding to each of these signals is output in this embodiment. In this case, the cherry signal, the watermelon signal, and the chance signal are not simultaneously output.

  As described above, the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment have the same BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal, and setting change signal as in the first embodiment. Since the cherry signal, the watermelon signal, and the chance signal are output to the outside, the call lamp device 200 ′ and the collecting unit 50 ′ of the second embodiment are configured as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53. The signal input section has been expanded so that a chance signal can also be input.

  Specifically, signal input units 278h to 278j for inputting a cherry signal, a watermelon signal, and a chance signal are added to the signal input unit of the calling lamp device 200 ′, and a cherry is added to the added signal input unit 278h. The signal is connected so that the watermelon signal is input to the signal input unit 278i and the chance signal is input to the signal input unit 278j, and the input of each signal is detected in these signal input units 278h to 278j, and the output corresponding to the signal detection Is output to the control microcomputer (MPU) 279.

  In other words, in the signal input units 278h to 278j of the second embodiment, a specific general that can specify which specific general winning out of a plurality of types of specific general winnings, such as cherry, watermelon, and chance combination, has occurred. Cherry signals, watermelon signals, and chance signals as winning information are input, and information input means is formed by the signal input units 278h to 278j.

  In the signal input units 278a to 278c according to the present embodiment, which of the special prizes among a plurality of types of special prizes associated with the transition to the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus has occurred. BB1 signal, BB2 signal, and RB signal, which are special winning information that can identify the player, are input, and information input means is formed by the signal input units 278a to 278c.

  Similarly, each port from the first port 581 to the fourth port 584 of the collection unit 50 also has signal input units 581h to 581j, signal input units 5821h to 582j for inputting a cherry signal, a watermelon signal, and a chance signal, Input units 583h to 583j and signal input units 5814h to 584j are added, cherry signals are added to the added signal input units 581h, 582h, 583h and 584h, and watermelon signals are supplied to the signal input units 581i, 582i, 583i and 584i. Are connected to the signal input units 581j, 582j, 583j, 584j so that a chance signal is input, and the input of each signal is detected in these signal input units 581h-581j, 5821h-582j, 583h-583j, 581h-584j. The output corresponding to the signal detection is And is output to the (MPU) 579.

  In the second embodiment, in order to input the cherry signal, the watermelon signal, and the chance signal, the three signal input units are expanded in the calling lamp device 200 ′ and the collecting unit 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, these signal input units may be provided by expanding four or more signal input units so that signals output from other types of slot machines can be input.

  Further, as described above, the slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment has a chance combination with no medal payout in place of the one-piece combination in the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the first embodiment. In order to correspond to this, the game information table stored in the EEPROM 276 of the calling lamp device 200 ′ has been changed to one corresponding to the chance combination as shown in FIG. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 63, the game information table stored in the 50 EEPROMs 576 is changed to one in which a single combination is replaced with a chance combination.

  Further, with respect to the most recent game table stored in the EEPROM 276 of the calling lamp device 200 ′, as shown in FIG. 62, the “replay” item is expanded to “general role”. In addition, the type of winning combination in the game specified by the input of the cherry signal, the watermelon signal, and the chance signal is stored. For the slot machines 01 ′ and 01 ″, “replay” by inputting a replay signal (slot machines 01 ′ and 01 ″) is also stored in the “general role” item, and the slot machine 01 also has a medal. “Replay” is stored when the payout number specified by the OUT signal matches the replay payout number in each gaming state.

  Note that the “Replay” item is also expanded to “general role” in the latest game table stored in the EEPROM 576 of the collection unit 50 ′ of the second embodiment. The type of winning combination in the game is stored in the same manner.

  Next, the duplicated winning related setting screen in the hall computer 140 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. The same items as the duplicated winning related setting screen of the first embodiment, the “set target table” item, There are an item of “number of judged games”, an item of “duplicate winning expectation display setting”, an item of “winning probability data by setting”, and an item of “game information setting for setting value estimation”, In addition to the item “Duplicate Winning Small Number of Set” which is different from the first embodiment, an item of “Duplicate Winning Expectation Data” and an item of “Previous Day Set Value” are newly provided.

  Among these items, the description of the same items as those in the first embodiment is omitted. The item of “Duplicate winning small number of combinations setting” item, which is different from the setting example of the first example, and the new item “Duplicate winning expectation data” ”And“ Prior day setting value ”will be described below.

  In the item “winning probability data by setting” of the second embodiment, the path to the data file (model b) of the winning probability data by setting shown in FIG. 57 for the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ is shown. , It may be specified on the file reference screen displayed by selecting and inputting “reference”.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the item of “Duplicate winning small combination setting” of the second embodiment, check boxes are provided corresponding to the display of “specify medal OUT signal” and the display of “specify individual signal”. In the case of a model that does not output a cherry signal, a watermelon signal, or a chance signal (single signal), such as the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″ of the first embodiment, the number of pulses included in the medal OUT signal The slot machine of the second embodiment is checked by checking a check box corresponding to the display of “specify medal OUT signal”, which is a setting for specifying the occurrence of each small combination to be duplicated (coincided with the number of payout medals). In the case of a model in which a cherry signal, a watermelon signal, and a chance signal are output individually such as 01, 01 ′, 01 ″, the setting of specifying the occurrence of each small combination by the output of these signals. It is sufficient to check the check box corresponding to the display of "individual signal specific".

  If the check box corresponding to the display of “specify medal OUT signal” is checked, the “duplicate winning combination number setting” item on the overlapping winning related setting screen in the first embodiment is displayed. In the selection window corresponding to the display of the small roles 1 to 4 provided in the item “number of small roles”, the type of small role and the number of payouts may be designated. Various processes in the first embodiment are performed in the calling lamp device 200 ′ and the collecting unit 50 ′.

  On the other hand, as in the second embodiment, the slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ to which the calling lamp device 200 ′ and the collection unit 50 ′ are connected individually outputs a cherry signal, a watermelon signal, and a chance signal. When the check box corresponding to the display of “specify individual signal” is checked in the case of the model, it corresponds to the display of the small roles 1 to 4 provided in the item “Duplicate winning small role setting”. In this selection window, it is only necessary to specify the type of the small role. By performing this setting, the interrupt monitoring process, the payout related process, the small role related process (calling) according to the second embodiment shown in FIGS. The lamp device 200 ′) and the small role related process 2 (collection unit 50 ′) are performed.

  In the second embodiment, since the small combination 1 to the small combination 4 correspond to the signals from the upper port to the lower port, the small combination 1 has a signal connected to the upper port. A small combination is designated, and a small combination of signals connected to lower ports is sequentially designated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55, a new item “duplicate winning expectation data” includes a window for designating a path to a data file of duplicate winning expectation data, and a “reference” selection input section. And a directory structure displayed by selecting and inputting “reference”, and selecting the corresponding data file (see FIG. 56) on the file reference screen in which the directory structure is iconified, The path data is automatically entered in the window.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the duplicate winning expectation data, for each small combination to be won in the slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ”(all wins simultaneously) and all the small roles to be won in the same win (simultaneous win). Among the winning prizes, various special prizes such as Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus and the percentage of double winning (simultaneous winning), that is, each sub-committee that is double winning (simultaneous winning) or these duplicate winning In the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″, there is a possibility (probability) that any of the small roles to be won (simultaneous winning) has won the same winning combination (simultaneous winning). It is stored for each setting value that can be set.

  In addition, each probability (%) in the duplicate winning expectation data of the second embodiment has a value of 0% when these actual values, for example, 0.4% are rounded off. Since the value of% is displayed, the player will recognize that the possibility of double winning (simultaneous winning) is “0”, so the value is rounded up to less than 1% of all probabilities. The invention is not limited to this. For example, all values less than 1% may be “less than 1%”, and other 1% or more probabilities may be rounded off or rounded down.

  Specifically, in the double win expectation data used in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, when Cherry wins, the probability of double win (simultaneous win) with the big bonus (1) is the set value 6 -1 is all 1%, the probability of double winning with the big bonus (2) (simultaneous winning) is 2% with the set value 6, 5 and 1% with the set value 4 to 1, the regular bonus and double winning ( The probability of simultaneous winning) is 2% for the set values 6 to 3, and 1% for the set values 2 and 1.

  In addition, when the watermelon wins, the probability of double winning (simultaneous winning) with the big bonus (1) is 10% for the setting value 6, 8% for the setting values 5 and 4, 7% for the setting values 3 and 2 The value 1 is 5%, and the probability of winning simultaneously with the big bonus (2) is 13% for the setting value 6, 11% for the setting values 5 and 4, 10% for the setting values 3 and 2, and the setting value 1 9%, the probability of double winning with the regular bonus (simultaneous winning) is 16% for setting value 6, 14% for setting value 5, 13% for setting value 4, 12% for setting value 3, 10% for setting value 2, The setting value 1 is 9%.

  Further, when the chance combination wins, the probability of double winning (simultaneous winning) with the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and regular bonus is all 1%.

  Similar to the winning probability data for each setting, the duplicate winning expectation data is the calling lamp device 200 corresponding to the slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the machine number designated in the “setting target car” item as the setting information. 'And is stored in the EEPROM 276 in the same manner as in the embodiment 1. Note that the winning probability data classified by setting is used in the expectation level display, and thus the collection unit 50 which does not perform display-related processing. Is not sent.

  In other words, in the EEPROM 276 of the second embodiment, a decision is made to allow generation of cherry, watermelon, and chance combination that are specific general winnings in the internal lottery of the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ as the pre-determining means. Duplicate winning expectation information that can specify the percentage of decisions that are simultaneously determined to allow the occurrence of various special prizes accompanying the transition to Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), and Regular Bonus Setting information having winning expectation degree data is stored, and the EEPROM 276 forms duplicate winning expectation degree information storage means.

  In addition, the duplicate winning expectation data stored in the EEPROM 276 of the second embodiment, which is the duplicate winning expectation information storage means, is the duplicate winning expectation for each specific general winning type, that is, for each cherry, watermelon, and chance combination. In addition to storing the duplicate winning expectation degree (%) as the degree information, the type of special winning, that is, the overlapping winning expectation information as the duplicate winning expectation information for each of BB (1), BB (2), and RB in FIG. The degree of expectation (%) is stored.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55, a new item “Previous Day Setting Value” is assigned to the slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ”of the machine number designated in the“ Setting Target ”item on the previous day. It is only necessary to input the set value that has been set. By inputting this “previous day set value” item, the previous day set value is stored in the EEPROM 276 as the previous day set value data, and the setting shown in FIG. In the determination in the step Ss6 of the value estimation process (see FIG. 37), the setting value specified in the item “previous day setting value” is used instead of the estimated setting value of the previous day data in the game information table as the previous day setting value. Used to perform the determination.

  That is, in the EEPROM 276 of the second embodiment, the previous day setting value input from the outside as the previous day setting value of the corresponding slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″, that is, the previous day setting of the duplicated winning related setting screen of FIG. Setting information having previous day setting value data including the content of the previous day setting value specified in the value item is stored, and the previous day setting value storage means is formed by the EEPROM 276.

  Hereinafter, from the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment, the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, the RB signal, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the replay signal, the setting change signal, the cherry signal, the watermelon signal, and the chance signal. Various processes performed in the call lamp device 200 ′ (collection unit 50 ′) in accordance with the output of the above will be described below based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  First, the presence / absence of signal change or input of these BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal, setting change signal, cherry signal, watermelon signal, chance signal is shown in FIG. The interrupt monitoring process is constantly monitored by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 (control microcomputer (MPU) 579).

  That is, in the interrupt monitoring process of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the presence of the medal IN signal is determined by having steps SK1 to SK5 as in the interrupt monitoring process of the first embodiment. Determination (SK1), determination of presence / absence of input of medal OUT signal (SK2), determination of presence / absence of change of BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal (SK3), and “No” determination in SK3 determination In this case, when the replay signal, cherry signal, watermelon signal, or chance signal is input, the step SK4 ′ determines whether or not the setting change signal is “No” in the determination of SK4 ′. SK5 step for determining whether or not there is an input, and if there is no signal input in the SK5 step, the process returns to the SK1 step. Through the steps SK1 to SK5, whether or not the medal IN signal is input, whether or not the medal OUT signal is input, and whether or not any of the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal is changed, and Whether a replay signal, cherry signal, watermelon signal, or chance signal is input and whether a setting change signal is input are monitored.

  When a medal IN signal is input to the signal input unit 278d (signal input units 581d to 584d) from the corresponding (connected) slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″, it is shown in FIG. 31 of SK6. The same input-related processing as in the first embodiment and the same digest game number counter updating processing as in the first embodiment are performed, and in SK8 to SK11, the latest game table update processing and replay time determination processing are performed as in the first embodiment. Then, a chance zone determination process is performed.

  However, in the replay time determination process and the chance zone determination process, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a winning combination of the rush combination or the falling combination because there is a payout equal to the number of medals to be paid out in the winning combination of the rush combination or the falling combination. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in the above-described RT related setting screen, the role type set as the entry role or fallen role is the “general role” of the latest game stored in the latest game table. Since it is the same as the role type stored in the box, it is determined whether or not there is a winning combination of a rush combination or a falling combination.

  If the medal OUT signal is input from the corresponding (connected) slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ to the signal input unit 278e (signal input units 581e to 584e), the process proceeds to step SK12 ′. 59, the payout-related processing according to the second embodiment including the steps of Sh1 and Sh2 is performed, and the processing at the steps of Sh1 and Sh2 includes Sh1 and the payout-related processing according to the first embodiment. Since it is the same as the process in the step of Sh2, description here is omitted.

  In addition, when any of the BB1 signal, BB2 signal, and RB signal output from the corresponding slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ has changed, the change is detected in the step SK3. Thus, as in the first embodiment, the process proceeds to steps SK13 and Sk14, and the game state specifying process shown in FIG. 36 and the set value estimation process (only the control microcomputer (MPU) 279) shown in FIG. 37 are performed. In the set value estimation process, as described above, when the previous day set value is specified in the item “previous day set value” of the duplicated win related setting screen, the determination using the previous day set value is performed. This is performed in step Ss6.

  Further, when a setting change signal is input from the corresponding (connected) slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ to the signal input unit 278g (signal input units 581g to 584g), Similarly, each process of the steps SK16 and SK17 is performed.

  Further, when there is an output (input) of any one of the replay signal, cherry signal, watermelon signal, and chance signal from the corresponding (connected) slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″, the input Is detected in the SK4 ′ step, and the process proceeds to the SK15 ′ step, so that in the latest game table shown in FIG. 15 (FIG. 21), the “general role” of the latest game already registered in the latest game table update process in SK9. In the category of the small role corresponding to the input signal, that is, “Replay” if the input signal is a replay signal, “Cherry” if the input signal is a cherry signal, and the input signal is a watermelon If the signal is a signal, “watermelon” is stored. If the input signal is a chance signal, “chance” is stored.

  Then, the process proceeds to the step SK15 +, and the small-combination related process shown in FIG. 60 is performed for the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 of the calling lamp apparatus 200 ′, and the control microcomputer (MPU) 579 of the collection unit 50 ′ is shown in FIG. The small role-related process 2 is executed.

  In the small role-related process performed by the calling lamp device 200 ′ of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, first, the respective steps of Sc1 and Sc7 are performed to be output (input). Whether the received signal is a cherry signal, a watermelon signal, or a chance signal.

  If the input signal is a cherry signal, it is determined as “Yes” in the step of Sc1, and the process proceeds to the step of Sc2, and it is specified that a cherry winning has occurred in the corresponding slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″. .

  That is, in the step Sc2 of the second embodiment, a plurality of types of the specific general winning cherries and watermelons based on the input of the cherry signal (specific general winning information) to the signal input unit 278f serving as information input means. In the chance combination, it is specified that a cherry winning has occurred, and the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that executes the step Sc2 of the small combination-related process constitutes a specific general winning occurrence specifying means.

  Then, proceeding to the step of Sc3, 1 is added and updated to the number of cherry wins of the data for today in the game information table.

  That is, in the step of Sc3 of the present embodiment, the cherry winning number is added and updated by adding 1 to the number of cherry winnings in the game information table, and the control microcomputer (MPU) that implements the step of Sc3. 279 constitutes a specific general winning number counting means.

  Next, proceeding to the step of Sc4, from the duplicate winning expectation data (see FIG. 56) in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276, with the double winning expectation of the cherry that has been identified in the Sc3 step. At that time, if the estimated setting value in the today data of the game information table, for example, if the estimated setting value is 6, BB (1) the overlapping winning expectation degree of the setting value 6 is 1%, BB (2) The duplicate winning expectation degree 2% and the RB duplicate winning expectation degree 2% are extracted.

  Then, the extracted BB (1) duplicate winning expectation 1%, BB (2) duplicate win expectation 2%, RB duplicate win expectation 2%, and the total value of these expectations 5% As in the first embodiment, the duplicate winning expectation degree is displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (b) (Sc5).

  That is, in the step of Sc5 of the second embodiment, when the occurrence of the cherry prize (specific general winning) is specified in the step of Sc2 which is the specific general winning occurrence specifying means, the duplicate winning expectation information storage means is provided. For each type of special prize corresponding to the cherry that is the type of the specific general prize for which the occurrence is specified, which is stored in the duplicate winning expectation data (see FIG. 56) in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276 BB (1), BB (2), and RB) for each of the winning winnings are displayed, and the overlapping winning expectation degree is displayed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 and the liquid crystal display device 266 for executing the step of Sc5. Information display means is configured.

  Next, the process proceeds to step Sc6 to update the small role game counter. Specifically, in the step of Sc6, by setting “0” to the elapsed game number of the small role game counter corresponding to cherry, which is the small role identified in the step of Sc2, and initializing it, In addition to setting the number of games to be added in the St4 step of the related process and setting “-” as the number of elapsed games of each small role other than the specified cherry, the number of games in the St4 step of the input related process is set. The small role game counter is updated so as to be excluded from the addition target, and the process ends.

  If the signal input from the corresponding slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ is a watermelon signal, “Yes” is determined in the step of Sc7, and the process proceeds to the step of Sc8. It is determined that a watermelon prize has occurred at 01 ′, 01 ″.

  That is, in step Sc8 of the second embodiment, a plurality of types of the specific general winning cherries and watermelons based on the input of the watermelon signal (specific general winning information) to the signal input unit 278g serving as the information input means. In the chance combination, it is specified that a watermelon winning has occurred, and a specific general winning generation specifying means is configured by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that executes the step Sc8 of the small role related process.

  Then, proceeding to the step of Sc9, 1 is added and updated to the number of watermelon winnings of today's data in the game information table.

  That is, in the step of Sc9 of this embodiment, the number of watermelon winnings is counted by adding 1 to the number of watermelon winnings in the game information table and updated, and the control microcomputer (MPU) that executes the step of Sc9 279 constitutes a specific general winning number counting means.

  Next, proceeding to the step of Sc10, from the duplicate winning expectation data (see FIG. 56) in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276, the duplicate winning expectation of the watermelon which is a small role identified in the step of Sc8. At that time, if the estimated setting value in the current data of the game information table, for example, the estimated setting value is 5, BB (1) duplicate winning expectation degree 8%, BB that is the overlapping winning expectation degree of the setting value 5 (2) Extracting the duplicate winning expectation 11% and the RB overlapping winning expectation 14%.

  Then, the extracted BB (1) duplicate win expectation degree 8%, BB (2) duplicate win expectation degree 11%, RB duplicate win expectation degree 14%, and the total value of these expectation degrees 33% As in the first embodiment, the duplicate winning expectation degree is displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (b) (Sc5).

  That is, in the step of Sc5 of the second embodiment, when the occurrence of a watermelon prize (specific general prize) is specified in the step of Sc8, which is the specific general prize occurrence specifying means, the duplicate winning expectation information storage means is provided. For each type of special prize corresponding to the watermelon which is the type of the specific general prize for which the occurrence is specified, which is stored in the duplicate winning expectation data (see FIG. 56) in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276 BB (1), BB (2), and RB) for each of the winning winnings are displayed, and the overlapping winning expectation degree is displayed by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 and the liquid crystal display device 266 for executing the step of Sc5. Information display means is configured.

  Next, proceeding to the step of Sc6, by setting “0” to the elapsed game number of the small role game counter corresponding to the watermelon identified in the step of Sc8 and initializing it, the St4 of the input related process It is set as the addition target of the number of games in the step and is excluded from the addition target of the number of games in the step of St4 of the input related process by setting “−” as the elapsed game number of each small role other than the specified watermelon. In this way, the small role game counter is updated and the process is terminated.

  If the signal output (input) from the corresponding slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ is a chance signal, it is determined “No” in the step of Sc7, and the process proceeds to the step of Sc11. It is determined that a chance combination prize has occurred in the machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″.

  That is, in step Sc11 of the second embodiment, a plurality of types of the specific general winning cherries and watermelons based on the input of the chance signal (specific general winning information) to the signal input unit 278h serving as information input means. Among the chance combinations, the occurrence of the chance combination is specified, and the specific general winning occurrence specifying means is configured by the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 that executes the step Sc11 of the small role related process.

  Then, proceeding to the step of Sc12, 1 is added and updated to the number of chance wins of today's data in the game information table.

  In other words, in the step of Sc12 of the second embodiment, by adding 1 to the number of chance wins in the game information table and updating it, the number of chance wins is totaled, and the control microcomputer (MPU that executes the step of Sc12) ) 279 constitutes a specific general winning number counting means.

  Next, proceeding to the step of Sc13, from the duplicate winning expectation data (see FIG. 56) in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276, the chance of winning the winning combination of the chance combination that has been identified in the step of Sc11. And, at that time, if the estimated setting value in today's data of the game information table, for example, if the estimated setting value is 4, BB (1) overlapping winning expectation degree 1%, which is the overlapping winning expectation degree of setting value 4, BB (2) Duplicate winning expectation degree 1% and RB overlapping winning expectation degree 1% are extracted.

  Then, the extracted BB (1) duplicate winning expectation degree 1%, BB (2) duplicate winning expectation degree 1%, RB overlapping winning expectation degree 1%, and the total value of these expectation degrees 3% As in the first embodiment, the duplicate winning expectation degree is displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (b) (Sc5).

  That is, when the occurrence of a chance combination (specific general winning) is specified in the step of Sc11 which is the specific general winning occurrence specifying means in the step of Sc5 of the second embodiment, it becomes the duplicate winning expectation information storage means. Special winning type corresponding to the chance combination that is the type of the specific general winning type in which the occurrence is specified, which is stored in the duplicate winning expectation data (see FIG. 56) in the setting information stored in the EEPROM 276 BB (1), BB (2), and RB, each of which is for each RB, is displayed. The control microcomputer (MPU) 279 for executing the step of Sc5 and the liquid crystal display device 266 are used for the expected number of winnings. Information display means is configured.

  Next, proceeding to the step of Sc6, by setting the elapsed game number of the small role game counter corresponding to the chance combination identified in the step of Sc11 to "0" and initializing it, St4 of the insertion related processing In addition to setting the number of games to be added in the step, and setting “−” to the number of elapsed games of each small role other than the specified chance combination, the number of games to be added in the step St4 of the insertion-related process is set. The small role game counter is updated so as to be excluded, and the process ends.

  In this way, like the call lamp device 200 of the first embodiment, the corresponding slot machine can have a chance combination without medal payout like the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment. Even if it is a model that occurs, by inputting a chance signal, the occurrence of a chance combination with no medal payout is specified, and when the chance combination is won, the chance combination is won simultaneously (simultaneous winning) It is possible to display the duplicate winning expectation that is a possibility.

  Next, the small role related process 2 performed in the collection unit 50 ′ according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

  In the small role-related process 2 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, when the signal input to each port from the connected slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ is a cherry signal, In step Sd1, it is determined as “Yes” and the process proceeds to step Sd2, and it is determined that a cherry winning has occurred in the connected slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″.

  Then, the process proceeds to the step of Sd3, and after adding 1 to the number of cherries won in the today's data corresponding to the serial number corresponding to the port to which the cherry signal is input in the game information table, the occurrence is specified in the step of Sd2. By setting “0” to the number of elapsed games of the small role game counter corresponding to the cherry number corresponding to the port and corresponding to the port number corresponding to the port, initialization is performed in the step of St4 of the insertion related processing. In addition to setting the number of games to be added, by setting “−” to the number of elapsed games of each small role other than the specified cherry, it is excluded from the number of games to be added in the step St4 of the input related process. The small role game counter is updated (Sd4), and the process ends.

  If the signal output (input) from the connected slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ is a watermelon signal, “Yes” is determined in step Sd5 and the process proceeds to step Sd6. It is determined that a watermelon winning has occurred in the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sd7, and after adding 1 to the number of times the watermelon winning of the data of today corresponding to the port to which the watermelon signal in the game information table is input is updated, the occurrence is identified in step Sd6. By setting “0” to the elapsed game number of the small role game counter corresponding to the watermelon corresponding to the port and corresponding to the port number corresponding to the port, initialization is performed in the step of St4 of the insertion related processing. In addition to setting the number of games to be added, by setting “−” to the number of elapsed games of each small role other than the specified cherry, it is excluded from the number of games to be added in the step St4 of the input related process. The small role game counter is updated (Sd4), and the process ends.

  If the signal input from the connected slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ is a chance signal, it is determined “No” in the step Sd5, and the process proceeds to the step Sd8. The slot machine 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ specifies that a chance combination win has occurred.

  Then, the process proceeds to step Sd9, and after adding 1 to the number of chance wins of today's data corresponding to the serial number corresponding to the port to which the chance signal is input in the game information table, the occurrence is specified in step Sd8. Step 4 of the insertion-related process by setting “0” to the elapsed game number of the small role game counter corresponding to the port number corresponding to the port corresponding to the chance role, which is a small role, and initializing it. In addition to setting the number of games to be added at the same time, and setting “-” to the number of elapsed games of each small role other than the specified chance, it is excluded from the number of games to be added at the step St4 of the input related process. The small role game counter is updated (Sd4), and the process is terminated.

  By doing so, as in the case of the collecting unit 50 of the first embodiment, the connected slot machines, like the slot machines 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the second embodiment, have a chance role without medal payout. Even if a model that outputs a cherry signal, watermelon signal, or chance signal individually, it collects game information such as the number of cherry winnings, the number of watermelon winnings, the number of chance winnings, etc. 140 can be transmitted.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the base based on the number of games to be calculated is used in the replay time transition determination and end determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, as in the above embodiment. If the number of bets in the chance zone state is “3” which is a predetermined number, the number of payouts in the calculation target game number may be used instead of the base.

  In the above embodiment, the collection units 50 and 50 ′ perform the interrupt monitoring process shown in FIG. 30 to collect various game information and game history, and to transfer or end the replay time (RT). The period is specified by determining the start and end of the zone state, the start and end of one unit (one unit period), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the collection units 50 and 50 are not limited thereto. 'Transmits the input state of signals input from the slot machines 1, 1', 1 ", 01, 01 ', 01" to the hall computer 140, and these interrupt monitoring processes are performed on the hall computer 140 side. In this case, it may be performed for each slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, 01, 01 ′, 01 ″.

  Furthermore, collection of various game information and game histories carried out by the collecting units 50 and 50 ′, transition and end of the replay time (RT), start and end of the chance zone state, 1 unit (1 unit period) A part of the processing such as specifying the period based on the start / end determination may be performed on the hall computer 140 side.

  Further, in the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ of the above embodiment, the model (type) that shifts (rushes) to the replay time by winning the transitional role (small role) is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined chance is derived and displayed by not winning the transitional role (small role) but not winning the transitional role (small role). Accordingly, it may be a model (type) that shifts (rushes into) the replay time.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although it was a low probability except in the chance zone state, although the model (type) which implements the lottery of the transition part of a replay time was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be a model (type) in which a replay time transitioning role is won only in the chance zone state and a replay time transition can be made only when the chance zone state is not performed, except in the chance zone state.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the model (type) that enters the replay time after the end of all bonuses is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition to the replay time by internal winning of the bonus, It may be a model (type) that has a replay time in the period until the internal winning bonus is won. Also in this case, according to the embodiment, the replay time and the subsequent bonus period are 1 unit. Specified as a period.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the model (type) by which the winning probability of a replay was only improved in the replay time (replay time state) was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, These replays In addition to improving the winning probability of the small role, the winning probability of the small role is improved (that is, the winning probability of the general role is improved), or the internal winning of the small role is notified on the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. Are also included in the replay time (replay time state) of the present invention.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as described above, it is generated in one unit (one unit period) together with the unit acquired medal number (unit TY) and the unit TY average which are the number of acquired difference medals in one unit (one unit period). 1 unit (one unit period) related to the number of medal earned medals (unit TY) since the loop count (unit RT count) and the unit loop average (unit RT count average) are calculated and displayed. And one unit (one unit period) related to the number of unit-acquired medals (unit TY), and the start of the bonus that triggers the chance zone state is one unit (one unit period), and the gaming state in the bonus Is included in one unit (one unit period), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) is arranged. If only the loop count (unit RT count) and the unit loop average (unit RT count average) are calculated and displayed and output without calculating and displaying the unit TY average, one unit as in the above embodiment. There is no need to synchronize (one unit period). For example, the start of the chance zone state after the bonus ends is set to one unit (one unit period), or a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the bonus. It may be the start of one unit (one unit period).

  Moreover, in the said Example, although it was set as the structure which provides the collection units 50 and 50 'separately, this invention is not limited to this, It replaces with these collection units 50 and 50', and the calling lamp apparatus 200 is used. , 200 ′ may transmit the transmission data string 1 and the transmission data string 2 described above, and the calling lamp devices 200 and 200 ′ may serve as the collection units 50 and 50 ′.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined operation, a setting change entry type model (type) according to the input of the setting change signal output when the setting change operation is performed in the slot machines 1 ″ and 01 ″. ), The occurrence of the chance zone state is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined operation is a reset that does not change the setting. The occurrence of the chance zone state may be determined in response to the input of a reset signal in a form different from the setting change signal output from the slot machines 1 "and 01" by these reset operations. good.

  In the above-described embodiment, various RT entry rates are displayed in%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in the table data 3 screen, for example, RT In the case of the input rate, the total RT count is a numerator and the total CZ count is a fraction display with the denominator, or the color corresponding to the total RT count in the bar display of the total CZ count is different from the color display. Thus, it may be possible to intuitively understand how much of the total number of CZs has shifted to RT, and these display modes and the like may be appropriately selected.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in the table-specific game information screen 2 of FIG. 48, the number of unit-acquired medals (unit TY) is displayed on the bar-shaped display of each unit together with the number of unit loops. This is preferable because it is possible to visually grasp the number of unit medals (unit TY) and the number of unit loops while grasping the occurrence status of one unit, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) and the number of unit loops may be displayed in a list corresponding to the generated number and the generated time of one unit.

  In the above embodiment, the number of medal earned medals (unit TY) is calculated based on the difference medal number of the state-specific data in which the same unit number is stored in the table-specific gaming state history table. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the collecting unit 50, the number of bets and the number of payouts for each game are accumulated from the time when the start of one unit period is determined. The number of unit acquired medals (unit TY) may be calculated from the difference between the number of bets accumulated until the time when the end is determined and the number of payouts.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of unit loops is the state-specific data in which “replay” having a different number is stored in the gaming state for the state-specific data in which the same unit number is stored in the table-specific gaming state history table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, every time it is determined in the collection unit 50 that the start of one unit period has been determined to shift to the replay time. Alternatively, 1 may be added to the number of transitions, and the number of unit loops may be specified from the number of transitions accumulated until the end of one unit period is determined.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although RT entry rate is displayed on the stand-by-game information screen 1, this invention is not limited to this, Together with these RT entry rate, the number of times of unit loop of today You may make it display the maximum value and the maximum value of the unit loop frequency of the past predetermined period.

  In each of the above embodiments, the RT entry rate type is RT entry rate (BB) and RT entry rate (RB), and the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are not distinguished. The invention is not limited to this, and the RT entry rate (BB) may be calculated for each type of big bonus as the RT entry rate (BB1) and the RT entry rate (BB2).

  Further, in the embodiment, the slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, in which the transition to the replay time to be a predetermined special winning combination is allowed to be generated in the internal winning, and further to the replay time by winning. 01, 01 ', 01 "are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the allowance to the replay time is allowed only by the internal winning, and the allowance It may be a slot machine that shifts to the replay time regardless of whether or not the winning combination has been won.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a signal for carrying out the determination to shift to the replay time and the end determination, a medal IN signal that is game execution information that can specify that the game has been executed, and that a replay winning has occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signals to be input are determined as transition to replay time or end determination. Is performed based only on the base determination, the medal IN signal as the betting number information, the medal OUT signal as the grant information, and the special winning period specifying information that can specify the period in which the special winning combination is occurring. Only the BB1 signal, the BB2 signal, and the RB signal may be used, and further, the transition to the replay time and the termination determination are performed at the replay occurrence rate. For example, in addition to each of these signals, a replay signal serving as replay winning information indicating that a replay winning has occurred may be added. Thus, if a signal other than the medal IN signal is used as the game execution information, a signal serving as the game execution information may be added.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), as the duplicate winning expectation information, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the number of cherry winnings, the number of watermelon winnings corresponding to the number of specific general winnings, The ratio of the winning watermelon winning number and the number of overlapping winning one sheet winning number is calculated and the ratio itself is displayed as%, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of watermelon winnings is 30 and the number of overlapping winning watermelon winnings is 2, “Today, 2 out of 30 watermelons are double winning (simultaneous winning)” You may display like this.

  In the above embodiment, each of the signals output from the external output board 110 of the corresponding slot machine 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ is called and the lamp devices 200, 200 ′ and the collecting unit 50, However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the signals output from these external output boards 110, these slot machines 1, 1 ', 1 ", 01 , 01 ′, 01 ″, these externally output BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal, setting change signal, cherry signal, watermelon signal, chance signal For example, the detection and detection of a driving voltage signal for a decorative lamp that is controlled to be turned on only when a big bonus (1) occurs is detected. Provided with a light sensor for detecting the lighting of a decorative lamp that is controlled to be turned on only when a big bonus (1) occurs, or is input to the calling lamp devices 200 and 200 ′ and the collecting units 50 and 50 ′. The decorative lamp lighting detection signal may be input to the calling lamp devices 200 and 200 ′ and the collecting units 50 and 50 ′.

  Further, in the first embodiment, cherry, watermelon, and one-piece combination (1) to (3), which are small combinations to be won simultaneously (simultaneously), are identified based on the number of pulses of the medal OUT signal. The occurrence of a prize is specified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the occurrence of these cherries, watermelons, and one-piece combination (1) to (3) is the same as in the second embodiment. In the case where a signal, a watermelon signal, or a single combination signal is output from the corresponding slot machine, the occurrence of each small combination may be specified by inputting these signals.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although a cherry, watermelon, one piece combination, and a chance combination are illustrated as a specific general prize to perform a double winning (simultaneous winning), this invention is not limited to this, These A replay may be included in a specific general prize to be won in duplicate (simultaneous win), or a specific general prize in which other small combinations other than these small combinations are to be selected (simultaneous win).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of specific general winnings (simultaneous winning) such as cherry, watermelon, single winning combination, chance winning combination, etc., are given as the specific general winnings to be overlapped (simultaneous winning). Although the form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific general prize to be duplicated (simultaneous prize) may be only one general prize.

  In the above embodiment, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus are all duplicated (simultaneous winning) with a specific general winning combination of cherry, watermelon, one piece or chance combination. The slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, 01, 01 ′, and 01 ″ are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these big bonus (1), big bonus ( 2) Any one of the regular bonuses, or only any two of them may be a slot machine that overlaps with a specific general winning combination (simultaneous winning).

  Further, in the embodiment, in the internal lottery as the pre-determining means, it is determined solely to allow the occurrence of a special prize accompanying the shift to the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that these special prizes are allowed to be generated must always give rise to specific general prizes (cherry, watermelon, one-piece combination). It may be determined at the same time to allow.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the number of winnings of each specific general winning (cherry, watermelon, 1 sheet combination) is displayed in the denominator format on the stand data 2 screen of FIG. 45 (c). The present invention is not limited to this, and it can be seen that the number of times of winning for each of these specific general winnings (cherry, watermelon, one-piece combination) corresponds to the number of times of winning the specific general winnings. In this way, it may be displayed together with the number of duplicate winnings.

  Moreover, in the said Example, as the calling lamp apparatus 200 and 200 'which is an information display apparatus, the control unit 300 mounted with the control microcomputer (MPU) 279 which performs various processes etc., and the liquid crystal which displays various information The display unit 209 having the display device 266 has a separate structure, and the control unit 300 can be arranged in the vicinity of the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, 01, 01 ′, 01 ″. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control unit 300 and the display unit 209 may be integrated.

  In the above embodiment, the settings of the call lamp devices 200 and 200 ′ and the collection unit 50 can be centrally set in the hall computer 140. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these halls are not limited to this. As described above, various settings in the computer 140 are set so that various settings are performed on the calling lamp device 200, 200 ′ side in the settings in the DIP switch 277, and these settings are set using a remote controller or the like. You may make it implement on the calling lamp apparatus 200, 200 'side.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the collection units 50 and 50 'transmit table game information data with respect to the hall computer 140, this invention is not limited to this, These table game information The data may be transmitted to the hall computer 140 by the calling lamp devices 200 and 200 ′.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when any of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus is generated, the information of the estimated set value is displayed over a predetermined number of games. Since the display of the estimated set value does not require generation of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the player's willingness to play can be improved to display these estimated set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information on these estimated setting values may be displayed in accordance with the menu operation of the table data. It may be selected as appropriate.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display of “setting improvement level may be used” is used as a display indicating that the setting value on the day exceeds the setting value on the previous day, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these displays The content only needs to indicate that the current day setting value exceeds the previous day setting value, and may be, for example, “setting ↑”.

  Moreover, in the said Example, it is determined that the setting value of the day exceeds the setting value of the previous day at the upper corner position of the display screen 261, and the setting value of the day does not exceed the setting value of the previous day. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these displays are displayed in the same way as the display of the estimated set value, for example, as a big bonus (1). , It may be displayed only in a predetermined number of games when any of the big bonus (2) and the regular bonus occurs, and the display timing of the display indicating that the setting value on the day exceeds the setting value on the previous day, What is necessary is just to select suitably.

  In the second embodiment, the duplicate winning expectation data is transmitted from the hall computer 140 to each of the calling lamp devices 200 and 200 ′. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the duplicate winning expectation data is transmitted. Expectation degree data is stored in a remote control or a storage medium that can be attached to the remote control, and transmitted from the remote control to the call lamp devices 200 and 200 ′, or the storage medium itself in which duplicate winning expectation degree data is stored. It may be mounted on the call lamp device 200, 200 ′ and used as a duplicate winning expectation information storage unit.

  In the embodiment, in the set value estimation process, the average value of the set values specified by the probabilities that are the evaluation information is used as the estimated set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these estimated settings. As the value, the estimated setting value may be calculated using a weighting index so that the value of the evaluation information (probability) with high reliability is regarded as important and the value of the evaluation information with low reliability is neglected.

  Moreover, in the said Example, in the setting value estimation process, five evaluation information (game information 1-game information 5) set in the item of the setting information estimation game information setting on the duplicate winning related setting screen of the hall computer 140 ( For each (probability), a corresponding set value is specified and an average is calculated to obtain an estimated set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the evaluation information (probability) is used as game information 1 Only, that is, the estimated set value may be estimated using only one piece of game information (evaluation information).

  Further, in the embodiment, the setting value estimation game information for estimating the estimated setting value is centrally set by the hall computer 140, but the present invention is not limited to this, The setting value estimation game information may be set by the remote controller, the dip switch 277, or the like on the calling lamp device 200, 200 ′ side.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability data classified by setting shown in FIG. 7 used for estimating the estimated setting value is transmitted from the hall computer 140 to each of the calling lamp devices 200 and 200 ′. The invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability data for each setting is stored in a remote control or a storage medium that can be attached to the remote control, and transmitted from the remote control to the calling lamp devices 200 and 200 ′. Alternatively, the storage medium itself in which the winning probability data for each setting is stored may be attached to the calling lamp devices 200 and 200 ′ and used as the setting specification information storage unit.

  Further, in the above embodiment, if the number of overlapping winnings of the small role specified in the step of Sh3 is 0 in the Sh8 step, the overlapping winning of the small role with respect to the number of winnings of the previous day data of the specified small role. The ratio of the number of times is calculated and displayed as the duplicate winning expectation degree, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the above-described second embodiment, each call lamp device 200 is displayed. If duplicate winning expectation data is transmitted and stored in advance and the number of overlapping winnings of the small role specified in step Sh3 is 0, the duplicate winning expectation of the small role based on the overlapping winning expectation data is stored. The degree may be displayed. At this time, as the setting value for specifying the overlapping winning expectation degree, the overlapping winning expectation degree corresponding to the estimated setting value of the previous day data may be used.

  In the embodiment, when occurrence of the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus is identified, the occurrence of the minor combination is identified immediately. When it is within 5 games since being identified, it is determined that the small combination is a duplicate winning small combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a watermelon prize has occurred. Thereafter, a cherry win is generated in the second game, and a big bonus (1) is generated in the second game after the cherry win is generated, at a predetermined number of games before the big bonus (1) is generated. When there are a plurality of small roles whose occurrences are specified within a certain 5 game (duplicate winning determination period), the most recently determined cherry winning that has been specified as a double winning small portion is not determined. Ku, may be to determine the watermelon prize is a small role, which earlier in the development has been identified as a duplicate winning Small Win.

  Similarly, when there are a plurality of small combinations whose occurrences are specified within 5 games (duplicate winning determination period), which is a predetermined number of games before the occurrence of the big bonus (1), For example, by assigning priorities in the descending order of the probability of duplicate winning (simultaneous winning), etc., among these multiple small combinations, the small combination with the highest priority is determined as the overlapping winning small combination You may make it do.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the winning type special winning number specifying information capable of specifying the duplicate winning special winning number and the single winning special winning number in the present invention, each overlapping winning small role serving as the overlapping winning determination period in the present invention is as follows. Cherry-BB1 double winning, which is the number of occurrences of Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), and Regular Bonus specified during the period from the occurrence of the game to the count of 5 games, which is the predetermined number of games Number of times, Cherry-BB2 double wins, Cherry-RB double wins, Watermelon-BB1 double wins, Watermelon-BB2 double wins, Watermelon-RB double wins, 1 (chance)-BB1 double wins, 1 (Chance)-BB2 duplicate winning count, 1 (chance)-RB overlapping winning count, and subtracting each of these overlapping winning counts alone The number of BB1 times, the number of BB2 times, and the number of RBs for which the number of special winning prizes can be calculated is totaled, that is, the total number of special winning prizes that can calculate the number of overlapping special winning prizes and the number of independent winning special prizes themselves is counted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the winning type special winning number specifying information, instead of the total special winning number, the single winning special winning number, that is, S5 of the game state specifying process of FIG. When it is determined “No” in each step of S15 and S23, the number of BB1 single winnings, the number of BB2 single winnings, and the number of RB single winnings to be updated may be added up in the game information table. Further, the number of BB1 single wins, the number of BB2 single wins, and the number of RB single wins are totaled, and the numbers of BB1, BB2 and RB BB1 number, BB2 number, RB number of BB1 single winning number, BB2 single winning number, RB single winning number are subtracted from BB1 number, BB2 number, RB number. You may make it do.

  In the above embodiment, the small role game counter continues counting after a predetermined number of games of 5 games or more, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of games is not limited to this. The count may be ended when it becomes 6 games exceeding 5 games, or conversely, 5 games of a predetermined number of games are set in the small role game counter at the start of counting and 1 game is executed. Each time it is done, 1 may be subtracted and updated (downcounting), and the downcounting may be terminated when the number of games becomes negative.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the winning probability of each winning combination, such as BB1 probability and cherry probability, is used as evaluation information, this invention is not limited to this, For example, BB1 as these evaluation information And BB2 generation ratio, BB1 and RB generation ratio, BB2 and RB generation ratio, and BB1 and each small combination generation ratio.

  In other words, the evaluation information may be different depending on each set value. For example, as shown in the duplicate win expectation data of the second embodiment, if the duplicate win expectation is different depending on each set value. In the case of the second embodiment, as shown in the first embodiment, the setting value is estimated by calculating the overlapping winning expectation degree for each overlapping winning small combination and collating with the overlapping winning expectation degree data. You may do it.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which only some of the small roles won in the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ are repeatedly won is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all of the generated small roles may be elected redundantly. In this case, the probability of overlapping winning of a part, for example, “Bell”, is very low, and even if the expected winning degree of “BELL” is displayed, the player's expectation is effective. If it is considered that the user cannot be stimulated, the item “Duplicate Winner Small Number Setting” in the duplicate win related setting screen shown in FIG. 27 or the “Duplicate Winner Small Set” in the duplicate win related setting screen shown in FIG. Yes, by specifying duplicate winning small roles that exclude these small winning roles with low duplicate expectation in the item, by excluding these small winning roles with low duplicate winning expectations, Only a small role with a high degree of duplicated winning expectation may be the display target of the duplicated winning expected degree.

  In the above embodiment, the slot machines 1, 1 ′, 1 ″, 01, 01 ′, 01 ″ in which all the overlapping winning small roles can be won independently are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, it is also possible for a small combination among these overlapping winning small combinations to always win a special prize and multiple winnings, that is, the degree of expected double winning is 100%.

  Further, according to the present invention, even if the corresponding slot machine does not output a signal during the replay time (RT), the number of medals obtained with the bonus period and the replay time (RT) period after the bonus as one unit. Although providing information on (TY) is an issue, in addition to these issues, the following second and third issues can also be solved.

  That is, in the above-mentioned patent document 1, after the occurrence of a bonus that is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the game information in the slot machine that rushes into the replay time state where the replay winning occurs with a high probability is managed. As a management device, a ratio of the number of times the replay time state is reached with respect to the number of bonus occurrences in these slot machines, that is, a replay time occurrence probability is summarized and displayed.

  However, in recent years, on the condition that a predetermined special winning combination occurs, a chance zone state where the transition to the replay time state is made possible is made, and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the chance zone state. Slot machines that shift to the replay time state have become mainstream, and when the slot machines that are in the chance zone state are managed by the management device of Patent Document 1 described above, an accurate replay time occurrence probability is obtained. There was a problem that it could not be provided.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such a problem, and even in a slot machine that is in a chance zone state, the occurrence probability of an accurate replay time state, that is, a replay time state for the chance zone that has occurred. A second object is to provide a management apparatus capable of providing a migration ratio.

That is, in order to solve this second problem, the management device of the present invention can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets based on game media (medals) for one game, A display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R, transmissive area 51b) that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols that can each be identified, thereby completing one game. A winning can be generated according to the display result, and when the winning occurs, a number of game media corresponding to the generated winning is given to the player,
Replay time state (replay time) that is likely to cause a replay winning combination that allows re-games without setting a new bet number on the condition that a predetermined special winning combination (bonus or rush entry) occurs A slot that transitions to the replay time state on the condition that the transition condition is satisfied in the chance zone state when the probability that the predetermined transition condition for transitioning to is established is higher than the normal state. A management device (hall computer 140, collection unit 50) for managing game information in the machine,
Special winning combination occurrence information (BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal) that can identify at least the occurrence of the special winning combination, and replay time transition information that can identify the transition to the replay time state Information input means (signal input units 278a to 278f) for inputting (medal OUT signal, replay signal);
Determination means for determining occurrence of the chance zone state and transition to the replay time state in the generated chance zone state based on special winning combination occurrence information and replay time transition information input to the information input means (Control microcomputer (MPU) 579; chance zone determination process, replay time determination process, gaming state identification process);
The number of chance zone occurrences (total number of CZs), which is the number of times it has been determined by the determination means that a chance zone state has occurred, and the number of replay time transitions (total number of times, which has been determined to have shifted to the replay time state) A counting means (today's game information table),
Replay time rush rate specifying information display means (CPU 142, stand) that displays replay time rush rate specifying information (RT rush rate) that can specify the ratio of the replay time transition frequency to the number of chance zone occurrences counted by the counting means. Separate game information display processing, display device 147),
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, the occurrence of the chance zone state and the transition to the replay time state in the generated chance zone state are determined based on the special winning combination occurrence information and the replay time transition information that are input. Since the number of occurrences of the chance zone and the number of times of replay time transition are summed up by the determination, it is possible to provide an accurate probability of occurrence of the replay time state, that is, a ratio of transition to the replay time state with respect to the generated chance zone.

In the management device of the present invention, the information input means includes, as the replay time transition information, grant information (medal OUT signal) that can specify the number of game media to be awarded according to the prize, and the replay prize. At least one of the replay winning information (replay signal) indicating that
The determination means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; replay time determination processing) is characterized by determining the transition to the replay time state based on information input to the information input means.
According to this feature, it is possible to determine the occurrence of a replay time state even for a slot machine that does not output replay time information that can specify the occurrence of a replay time state, and thus, the occurrence probability of an accurate replay time state, i.e., has occurred. The transition ratio to the replay time state with respect to the chance zone can be provided.

In the management device of the present invention, the slot machine can generate a plurality of types of special winning combinations (Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus). Depending on the type, it becomes the chance zone state with a different period (number of games),
The information input means receives the special winning combination generation information (BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal) that can specify the type of the special winning combination that has occurred,
The determination means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; replay time determination process (Sr5)) determines the type of special winning combination (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular corresponding to the chance zone state determined to be generated. Bonus)
The counting means includes the chance zone occurrence count (BB1, BB2, RB count) and the replay time transition count (RT count in BB-CZ, RB) for each type of special winning combination specified by the determination means. -RT count in CZ)
The replay time rush rate specifying information display means is a replay time rush rate specifying information capable of specifying a ratio of the replay time transition frequency to the chance zone occurrence frequency for each type of special winning combination counted by the counting means ( An RT entry rate (BB) and an RT entry rate (RB)) are displayed.
According to this feature, the probability of occurrence of an accurate replay time state for each type of special winning combination, that is, the chance of occurrence, even for a slot machine that has a chance zone state with a different period depending on the type of special winning combination that has occurred. A transition ratio to a replay time state for a zone can be provided.

Further, the management device of the present invention provides a re-entry model setting means for setting whether or not the slot machine is a re-entry type slot machine that transitions again to the chance zone state after the end of the replay time state. (Hall computer 140, RT related setting screen)
Replay time end information (medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal) that can specify the end of the replay time state is input to the information input means,
The determination means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; replay time determination processing) is configured to end the replay time when the slot machine is set as a re-entry type slot machine by the re-entry model setting means. The end of the replay time state is specified based on the information, and the end of the specified replay time state is determined as the occurrence of a new chance zone state.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide an accurate probability of occurrence of a replay time state, that is, a ratio of transition to the replay time state with respect to the chance zone that has occurred, even for a re-entry type slot machine.

Further, the management device of the present invention is an operation entry model for setting whether or not the slot machine is an operation entry type slot machine that shifts to the chance zone state by performing a predetermined operation (setting change operation). Setting means (hall computer 140, RT related setting screen)
The determination means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; interrupt monitoring process, gaming state history table initialization process) is set so that the slot machine is an operation entry type slot machine by the operation entry model setting means. (Yes in SK16, Sy3) based on establishment of a predetermined operation corresponding condition for specifying or estimating that the predetermined operation has been performed (input of a setting change signal, reception of a connection confirmation request) The occurrence of the chance zone state is determined.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide an accurate replay time state occurrence probability, that is, a ratio of transition to the replay time state with respect to the chance zone that has occurred, even for an operation-rush type slot machine.

In the management device of the present invention, the slot machine may be a slot machine in which the chance zone state ends when a predetermined number of games (a prescribed number of games) are consumed, or the chance zone Chance zone end condition setting means (hole computer 140, RT related setting screen) for setting whether the state is a slot machine that ends,
In the information input means, game execution information (medal IN signal) that can specify that the game has been executed or grant information (medal OUT signal) that can specify the number of game media to be given according to the winning Is entered,
The determination means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; chance zone determination processing) is set when a predetermined number of games are set by the chance zone end condition setting means as the chance zone state end condition of the slot machine. Determines the end of the chance zone state based on the number of games based on the game execution information input to the information input means (Sz12; the end is determined when the number of digested games in the digested game number counter is “0”) When the chance zone end condition setting unit is set with a predetermined fall winning combination as the chance zone state end condition of the slot machine, the game specified from the grant information input to the information input unit The number of media granted (number of payouts) matches the number of game media given when the falling combination occurs. Zui determine the end chances zone state is characterized in (Sz12, it ends the same payout and tumble combination determined during chance zone state) to.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide an accurate replay time state occurrence probability, that is, a ratio of transition to the replay time state with respect to the chance zone that has occurred, even for an operation-rush type slot machine.

  Further, in Patent Document 1, information on a slot machine that enters into a replay time state in which a replay winning is generated with high probability after occurrence of a bonus that is a special gaming state advantageous for the player is displayed. As the management device, there is described a device that counts and displays the number of times of RT entry, which is the number of times of entry into the replay time state in these slot machines.

  However, in recent years, in order to shift to a replay time state in which there is a high possibility that a replay winning combination that can be replayed without setting a new number of bets is generated on condition that a predetermined special winning combination occurs. The chance zone state in which the probability that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied is higher than that in the normal state, the state is shifted to the replay time state on the condition that the transition condition is satisfied in the chance zone state, and the replay time A slot machine that again enters the chance zone state after the end of the state has been put into practical use. However, the management device of Patent Document 1 is useful for managing a slot machine that again enters the chance zone state after the end of the replay time state. There was a problem that it was not possible to provide information.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and provides a management device capable of providing information useful for managing a slot machine that again enters the chance zone state after the end of the replay time state. The third purpose is to do.

That is, in order to solve this third problem, the management device of the present invention can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets based on game media (medals) for one game, A display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R, transmissive area 51b) that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols that can each be identified, thereby completing one game. A winning can be generated according to the display result, and when the winning occurs, a number of game media corresponding to the generated winning is given to the player,
Transition to a replay time state (replay time) in which a replay winning combination that can be replayed without setting a new number of bets is likely to occur on condition that a predetermined special winning combination (bonus) occurs A chance zone state in which a probability that a predetermined transition condition for satisfying the condition is satisfied is higher than that in the normal state, and the transition to the replay time state is performed on the condition that the transition condition is satisfied in the chance zone state. A management device (a hall computer 140, a collection unit 50) for managing game information in a slot machine that again enters the chance zone state after the end of the time state,
Special winning combination occurrence information (BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal) that can specify the occurrence of the previous special winning combination, and an out-of-transition end condition (a specified number of games) other than the transition to the replay time state Chance zone end specifying information (medal IN signal, medal OUT signal) that can specify the end of the chance zone state due to the formation of a digestion, a winning combination of a fallen role, transition to the replay time state, and end of the replay time state Information input means (collection unit 50, first port 581 to fourth port 584) to which identifiable replay time period information (medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, replay signal, BB1 signal, BB2 signal, RB signal) is input )When,
Based on the special winning combination occurrence information, the chance zone end specifying information, and the replay time period information input to the information input means, the chance zone state start and the replay time state end chance associated with the occurrence of the special winning combination Identifies the start of the zone state, the start and end of the replay time state in the chance zone state, and the end of the chance zone state due to the establishment of the non-transition end condition, and accompanying the occurrence of the specified special winning combination One unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579) for specifying one unit period including the period from the start of the chance zone state to the end of the chance zone state due to the establishment of the non-transition end condition specified for the first time after the start of the chance zone state ; Chance zone determination processing, replay time determination processing, gaming state identification processing A),
Aggregating means (CPU 142, individual game information display processing, individual game state history table) for totalizing the number of occurrences of the replay time state that occurred within one unit period specified by the one unit period specifying means;
Replay time occurrence number specifying information display means (CPU 142) for displaying replay time occurrence number specifying information (table-specific game information screen 2) capable of specifying the number of occurrences of the replay time state in one unit period counted by the counting means. The game information display process according to the table and the display device 147) are provided.
According to this feature, one unit period including the period from the start of the chance zone state accompanying the occurrence of the special winning combination to the end of the chance zone state due to the establishment of the non-transition end condition specified for the first time after the start is specified. In addition, the number of occurrences of the replay time state that occurred within the specified one unit period is aggregated, and replay time occurrence number specifying information that can specify the number of occurrences of the replay time state in the one unit period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide replay time occurrence count specifying information that is useful for managing a slot machine that again enters the chance zone state after the end of the replay time state.

In the management device of the present invention, the one unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; gaming state specifying process) is a function of generating the special winning combination (bonus) during the one unit period. It is characterized in that the one unit period is not ended but is continued on condition that special winning combination occurrence information is input.
According to this feature, the period during which the gaming state (chance zone state, replay time state, special gaming state) advantageous to the player associated with the occurrence of the special winning combination continues is set as one unit period. Replay time occurrence count specific information can be provided.

In the management device of the present invention, the one unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579; gaming state specifying process) receives the special winning combination generation information during the replay time state. While the one unit period is continued without ending, when the special winning combination generation information is input during the chance zone state, the one unit period is ended, and from the special winning combination generation information, The period after the chance zone state associated with the occurrence of the specified special winning combination is a new one-unit period.
According to this feature, when a special winning combination occurs in the chance zone state where the degree of advantage for the player is low compared to the replay time state, as in the case where the special winning combination occurs in the normal gaming state, By specifying the start of a new one-unit period, it is possible to provide more appropriate replay time occurrence count specifying information.

Further, the management device of the present invention is an operation entry model for setting whether or not the slot machine is an operation entry type slot machine that shifts to the chance zone state by performing a predetermined operation (setting change operation). Setting means (hall computer 140, RT related setting screen)
The one unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579), when the corresponding slot machine is set as an operation entry type slot machine by the operation entry model setting means (in SK16, Sy3, “ Yes ”) is the start of the chance zone state based on the establishment of a predetermined operation response condition (input of a setting change signal, reception of a connection confirmation request) for specifying or estimating that the predetermined operation has been performed. And 1 unit period including the chance zone state where the start is determined is specified.
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately specify one unit period even for an operation-rush type slot machine, and more appropriate replay time occurrence number specifying information can be provided.

In the management device of the present invention, the slot machine may be a slot machine in which the chance zone state ends when a predetermined number of games (a prescribed number of games) are consumed, or the chance zone Chance zone end condition setting means (hole computer 140, RT related setting screen) for setting whether the state is a slot machine that ends,
In the information input means, as the chance zone end specifying information, it is possible to specify game execution information (medal IN signal) that can specify that the game has been executed, or the number of game media to be given according to the winning Grant information (medal OUT signal) is input,
The one unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579) is configured to use a predetermined number of games in the chance zone end condition setting means as the chance zone state end condition of the corresponding slot machine. Specifies the end of the chance zone state based on the number of games based on the game execution information input to the information input means (Sz12; the end is determined when the number of digested games in the digested game number counter is “0”) When the predetermined winning combination is set by the chance zone end condition setting means as the chance zone state end condition of the corresponding slot machine, it is specified from the grant information input to the information input means. The number of game media to be granted (the number of payouts) must match the number of game media to be granted when the falling combination occurs. Based identify the end of a chance zone state is characterized in (Sz12, ends the same payout and tumble combination determined during chance zone state) to.
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately specify one unit period even for slot machines with different end conditions for the chance zone state, and more appropriate replay time occurrence number specifying information can be provided.

Further, the management device of the present invention provides information used by the one unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 279) for specifying the start and end of the replay time state, the game execution information, the grant information and the information Replay time period specifying information type setting means (hole computer 140, RT-related setting screen) for setting which information is to be included in the replay winning information,
The one unit period specifying means specifies the start and end of the replay time state based on the information set by the replay time period specifying information type setting means, and includes a period from the specified start to the end. One unit period is specified.
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately specify one unit period even for slot machines with different replay time start and / or end conditions, and more appropriate replay time occurrence count specifying information can be provided.

The management device of the present invention
Status of occurrence of the chance zone state, the replay time state, and the special winning combination (bonus) generated in at least one unit period (one unit) specified by the one unit period specifying means (control microcomputer (MPU) 579) Occurrence status specifying information storage means (table-specific gaming status history table) for storing occurrence status specifying information (data by status) capable of specifying
Aspect capable of identifying the chance zone state, the replay time state, and the occurrence status of the special winning combination that occurred during the one unit period based on the occurrence status specifying information stored in the occurrence status specifying information storage means And a generation status display means (CPU 142, stand-by game information display processing, display device 147).
According to this feature, not only the number of replay time states that occurred during one unit period, but also more detailed information, the chance zone state, replay time state, and special winning combination that occurred during one unit period Can be provided.

The management device of the present invention
The counting means (CPU 142, stand-by gaming information display processing, stand-by gaming status history table) counts the number of occurrences of the replay time state for each unit period specified by the one unit period specifying means,
1 unit period number totaling means (CPU 142, game information display processing by unit) for counting the number of 1 unit periods corresponding to the total number of occurrences,
Loop for displaying 1 unit period number specific information (table-specific game information screen 2) for each loop number that can specify the number of 1 unit period corresponding to each occurrence count counted by the loop unit 1 unit period number counting means 1 unit period number specific information display means by number of times (CPU 142, game information display processing by table, display device 147) is provided.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide not only the number of replay time states that occur during one unit period but also the occurrence status of one unit period for each number of occurrences of the replay time state, which is more detailed information.

1 slot machine 1 'slot machine 1 "slot machine 01 slot machine 01' slot machine 01" slot machine 2 medal lending machine 40 game control board
41 Main control unit 50 Collection unit 59 Signal cable 60 Relay unit 90 Production control board 91 Sub control unit 110 External output board 140 Hall computer 142 CPU
143 RAM
145 Storage device 146 Input device 147 Display device 149 Communication unit 200 Call lamp device 200 ′ Call lamp device 209 Display unit 257 Reception window 260 Display substrate 261 Display screen 264 Display substrate 265 Reception unit 267 Light bulb 268 Lighting control circuit 269 Communication unit 270 Control Substrate 277 Dip switch 278a Signal input unit 278b Signal input unit 278c Signal input unit 278d Signal input unit 278e Signal input unit 278f Signal input unit 278g Signal input unit 278h Signal input unit 278i Signal input unit 278j Signal input unit 278L Signal input / output unit 278R Signal input / output unit 279 Control microcomputer 280 Base 300 Control unit 569 Communication unit 575 RAM
576 EEPROM
579 Control microcomputer 581 First port 582 Second port 583 Third port 584 Fourth port 581a-j Signal input unit 582a-j Signal input unit 583a-j Signal input unit 584a-j Signal input unit

Claims (1)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets based on the game medium for one game, and the display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be individually identified. As a result, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device. When a winning occurs, a number of game media corresponding to the generated winning is given to the player. A management device that centrally manages game information in a plurality of slot machines that transition to an expected increase state in which an expected increase / decrease rate of game media per game exceeds 1 when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
Specify bet amount information that can specify the bet amount, grant information that can specify the number of game media to be awarded in accordance with the winning, and a period in which a special gaming state is shifted to when a predetermined special winning combination is generated Information input means for inputting possible special gaming state period specific information;
Game number specifying means for specifying the number of games based on the betting number information;
Determination means for determining a transition to the expected increase state based on the number of games specified by the number-of-games specifying means and the grant information input to the information input means;
The determination method used for determining the transition to the expected increase state in the determination means includes the bet number specified from the bet number information input to the information input means and the grant information input to the information input means A plurality of determination methods including: a first determination method based on a difference from the number of game media specified from the first and a second determination method based on a frequency of occurrence of a specific combination based on the grant information input to the information input unit Setting means to set from home,
Based on the bet amount information and the grant information input to the information input means, the bet number and the number of game media to be granted in one unit period consisting of the special gaming state and the expected increase state A calculation means for calculating a difference number;
1 unit period difference number specifying information display means for displaying 1 unit period difference number specifying information capable of specifying the difference number in one unit period calculated by the calculating means;
Based on the information input to the information input means, the transition status to the expected increase state during the special game state after the end of the one special game state until the next special game state is specified Expected increase transition information display means for displaying possible expected increase transition information,
With
In the setting means, setting using only the first determination method, setting using only the second determination method, and setting using both the first determination method and the second determination method are possible. A management device characterized by being.

Images